Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and
EX4200 Ethernet Switches
Published: 2010-08-11
Revision 11
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Juniper Networks, Inc.
1194 North Mathilda Avenue
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net
This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an Integrated Systems Company. Copyright © 1986-1997,
Epilogue Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. This program and its documentation were developed at private expense, and no part
of them is in the public domain.
This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes, copyright © 1988, 1989, 1993, University of Toronto.
This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentation
and software included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California. Copyright ©
1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994. The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
GateD software copyright © 1995, the Regents of the University. All rights reserved. Gate Daemon was originated and developed through
release 3.0 by Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’s
HELLO routing protocol. Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Portions of the GateD
software copyright © 1988, Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1991, D.
L. S. Associates.
This product includes software developed by Maker Communications, Inc., copyright © 1996, 1997, Maker Communications, Inc.
Juniper Networks, Junos, Steel-Belted Radius, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United
States and other countries. The Juniper Networks Logo, the Junos logo, and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other
trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify,
transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.
Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are
owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,192,051, 6,333,650, 6,359,479, 6,406,312,
6,429,706, 6,459,579, 6,493,347, 6,538,518, 6,538,899, 6,552,918, 6,567,902, 6,578,186, and 6,590,785.
EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
Writing: Appumon Joseph, Aviva Garrett, Greg Houde, Hemraj Rao S, Hareesh Kumar K N, Keldyn West, Shikha Kalra, Steve Levine
Editing: Cindy Martin, Rajan V K
Illustration: Faith Bradford Brown
Cover Design:
Revision History
15 March 2008—Revision 1
28 April 2008—Revision 2
12 August 2008—Revision 3
30 January 2009—Revision 4
14 April 2009—Revision 5
20 July 2009—Revision 6
4 November 2009—Revision 7
18 December 2009—Revision 8
17 February 2010—Revision 9
May 2010—Revision 10
August 2010—Revision 11
The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
ii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. The Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through
the year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase
order or, to the extent applicable, to any reseller agreement or end-user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks.
By using this software, you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions.
Generally speaking, the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions
against certain uses. The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated. You should consult
the license for further details.
For complete product documentation, please see the Juniper Networks Web site at www.juniper.net/techpubs.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. iii

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE.
BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS
CONTAINED HEREIN, YOU (AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER, AS A REPRESENTATIVE/AGENT AUTHORIZED TO
BIND THE CUSTOMER) CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED
HEREIN, THEN (A) DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE, AND (B) YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS
REGARDING LICENSE TERMS.
1. The Parties. The parties to this Agreement are (i) Juniper Networks, Inc. (if the Customer’s principal office is located in the Americas) or
Juniper Networks (Cayman) Limited (if the Customer’s principal office is located outside the Americas) (such applicable entity being referred
to herein as “Juniper”), and (ii) the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable
license(s) for use of the Software (“Customer”) (collectively, the “Parties”).
2. The Software. In this Agreement, “Software” means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper-supplied software, for
which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller, or which was embedded by
Juniper in equipment which Customer purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller. “Software” also includes updates, upgrades
and new releases of such software. “Embedded Software” means Software which Juniper has embedded in or loaded onto the Juniper
equipment and any updates, upgrades, additions or replacements which are subsequently embedded in or loaded onto the equipment.
3. License Grant. Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein, Juniper grants to Customer
a non-exclusive and non-transferable license, without right to sublicense, to use the Software, in executable form only, subject to the
following use restrictions:
a. Customer shall use Embedded Software solely as embedded in, and for execution on, Juniper equipment originally purchased by
Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
b. Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit, or as many chassis or processing units
for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees; provided, however, with respect to the Steel-Belted Radius or Odyssey Access
Client software only, Customer shall use such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space
and containing any number of processors. Use of the Steel-Belted Radius or IMS AAA software on multiple computers or virtual machines
(e.g., Solaris zones) requires multiple licenses, regardless of whether such computers or virtualizations are physically contained on a single
chassis.
c. Product purchase documents, paper or electronic user documentation, and/or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may
specify limits to Customer’s use of the Software. Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats, registered endpoints, concurrent
users, sessions, calls, connections, subscribers, clusters, nodes, realms, devices, links, ports or transactions, or require the purchase of
separate licenses to use particular features, functionalities, services, applications, operations, or capabilities, or provide throughput,
performance, configuration, bandwidth, interface, processing, temporal, or geographical limits. In addition, such limits may restrict the use
of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software.
Customer’s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses.
d. For any trial copy of the Software, Customer’s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download, installation or use of the
Software. Customer may operate the Software after the 30-day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so. Customer may not
extend or create an additional trial period by re-installing the Software after the 30-day trial period.
e. The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer’s
enterprise network. Specifically, service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the
Steel-Belted Radius software to support any commercial network access services.
The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer. No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase
the applicable license(s) for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
4. Use Prohibitions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to, and Customer agrees
not to and shall not: (a) modify, unbundle, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software; (b) make unauthorized
copies of the Software (except as necessary for backup purposes); (c) rent, sell, transfer, or grant any rights in and to any copy of the
Software, in any form, to any third party; (d) remove any proprietary notices, labels, or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product
in which the Software is embedded; (e) distribute any copy of the Software to any third party, including as may be embedded in Juniper
equipment sold in the secondhand market; (f) use any ‘locked’ or key-restricted feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability
without first purchasing the applicable license(s) and obtaining a valid key from Juniper, even if such feature, function, service, application,
operation, or capability is enabled without a key; (g) distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party; (h) use the
iv Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (i)
use Embedded Software on non-Juniper equipment; (j) use Embedded Software (or make it available for use) on Juniper equipment that
the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (k) disclose the results of testing or benchmarking
of the Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Juniper; or (l) use the Software in any manner other than as expressly
provided herein.
5. Audit. Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement. Upon request by Juniper,
Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement.
6. Confidentiality. The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper.
As such, Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence,
which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software
for Customer’s internal business purposes.
7. Ownership. Juniper and Juniper’s licensors, respectively, retain ownership of all right, title, and interest (including copyright) in and to
the Software, associated documentation, and all copies of the Software. Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance
of any right, title, or interest in the Software or associated documentation, or a sale of the Software, associated documentation, or copies
of the Software.
8. Warranty, Limitation of Liability, Disclaimer of Warranty. The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty
statement that accompanies the Software (the “Warranty Statement”). Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support
the Software. Support services may be purchased separately. Any such support shall be governed by a separate, written support services
agreement. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA,
OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES, OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER
BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT DOES
JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, WILL OPERATE WITHOUT
ERROR OR INTERRUPTION, OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK. In no event shall Juniper’s or its suppliers’
or licensors’ liability to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of warranty, or otherwise, exceed the price paid
by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim, or if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product, the price paid by
Customer for such other product. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in
reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein, that the same reflect an allocation of risk between
the Parties (including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss), and that the same
form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties.
9. Termination. Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination
of the license granted herein. Upon such termination, Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related
documentation in Customer’s possession or control.
10. Taxes. All license fees payable under this agreement are exclusive of tax. Customer shall be responsible for paying Taxes arising from
the purchase of the license, or importation or use of the Software. If applicable, valid exemption documentation for each taxing jurisdiction
shall be provided to Juniper prior to invoicing, and Customer shall promptly notify Juniper if their exemption is revoked or modified. All
payments made by Customer shall be net of any applicable withholding tax. Customer will provide reasonable assistance to Juniper in
connection with such withholding taxes by promptly: providing Juniper with valid tax receipts and other required documentation showing
Customer’s payment of any withholding taxes; completing appropriate applications that would reduce the amount of withholding tax to
be paid; and notifying and assisting Juniper in any audit or tax proceeding related to transactions hereunder. Customer shall comply with
all applicable tax laws and regulations, and Customer will promptly pay or reimburse Juniper for all costs and damages related to any
liability incurred by Juniper as a result of Customer’s non-compliance or delay with its responsibilities herein. Customer’s obligations under
this Section shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement.
11. Export. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any
applicable foreign agency or authority, and not to export or re-export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such
restrictions, laws or regulations, or without all necessary approvals. Customer shall be liable for any such violations. The version of the
Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting Customer’s ability to export the Software without
an export license.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. v

12. Commercial Computer Software. The Software is “commercial computer software” and is provided with restricted rights. Use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS
227.7201 through 227.7202-4, FAR 12.212, FAR 27.405(b)(2), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) as applicable.
13. Interface Information. To the extent required by applicable law, and at Customer's written request, Juniper shall provide Customer
with the interface information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program, on
payment of applicable fee, if any. Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use
such information in compliance with any applicable terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available.
14. Third Party Software. Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products
or technology are embedded in (or services are accessed by) the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement,
and such licensor or vendor shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper. In addition, certain third party
software may be provided with the Software and is subject to the accompanying license(s), if any, of its respective owner(s). To the extent
portions of the Software are distributed under and subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such
portions publicly available (such as the GNU General Public License (“GPL”) or the GNU Library General Public License (“LGPL”)), Juniper
will make such source code portions (including Juniper modifications, as appropriate) available upon request for a period of up to three
years from the date of distribution. Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks, Inc., 1194 N. Mathilda Ave., Sunnyvale, CA
94089, ATTN: General Counsel. You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html, and a copy of the LGPL
at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html .
15. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws
principles. The provisions of the U.N. Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. For any disputes
arising under this Agreement, the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal
courts within Santa Clara County, California. This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer
with respect to the Software, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software, whether oral or written
(including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order), except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an
authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained
herein. No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing
by the party to be charged. If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid, the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity
of the remainder of this Agreement. This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language, and the
Parties agree that the English version will govern. (For Canada: Les parties aux présentés confirment leur volonté que cette convention de
même que tous les documents y compris tout avis qui s'y rattaché, soient redigés en langue anglaise. (Translation: The parties confirm that
this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language)).
vi Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
About This Topic Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
How to Use This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Documentation Symbols Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Requesting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Opening a Case with JTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications

Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EX3200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Uplink Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
EX3200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EX4200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LCD Panel Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LCD Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Field-Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. vii

Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Standards Supported by These Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . 81
Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 90
Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200
and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 6 Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . 102
viii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . 107
Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI
Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within
the Same Wiring Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual
Chassis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis
Configuration Using Autoprovisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

Chapter 9 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface . . . . . 121
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet . . . 122
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet . . . 124
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management . . 152
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Configuring the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. ix

Connecting the Modem to the Console Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
EX3200 and EX4200 Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) . . . . . . . . . 167
Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI
Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Remove a Member Switch, Replace with a Different Switch, and Reapply
the Old Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for
Reassignment to a Different Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance

Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . 193
The interface on one of the last four built-in network ports in an EX3200
switch (for example, interface ge-0/0/23) is down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed
in an SFP+ uplink module is down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or
SFP+ uplink module installed is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
x Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Part 7 Returning Hardware

Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component . . 200
Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX
Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . 202
Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . 204
Part 8 Safety Information

Chapter 17 General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . 212
Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . 213
General Laser Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Class 1 Laser Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Class 1 LED Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Laser Beam Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . 216
Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 221
Wall-Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Battery Handling Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Jewelry Removal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Lightning Activity Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Operating Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Product Disposal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xi

Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches . . . . 235
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . 236
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 240
Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . 243
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
In Case of Electrical Accident: Action to Take on an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . 248
Part 9 Compliance Information

Chapter 21 Compliance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 252
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
FCC Part 15 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Non-Regulatory Environmental Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . 254
Declaration of Conformity for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
xii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures
Figure 1: EX3200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 2: EX3200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3: EX3200 Switch Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 4: EX4200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 5: EX4200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 6: EX4200-24F Switch with 24 SFP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 7: EX4200 Switch Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 8: LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 9: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 10: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 11: LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 12: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 13: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . 22
Figure 14: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 15: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 16: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 17: 320 W AC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 18: 600 W and 930 W AC Power Supplies in EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 19: DC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 20: Fan Tray Used in an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 21: Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 22: Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 24: SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 25: SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 26: XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 27: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 29: Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xiii

Figure 30: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 31: EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring
Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Topology Using Short and Medium Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 34: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a
Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 35: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a
Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 36: Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 37: Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . 121
Figure 38: Attaching the Mounting Bracket Along the Front of the Switch . . . . . . 123
Figure 39: Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 40: Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side-Rail Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 41: Attaching the Side-Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 42: Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 43: Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four-Post Rack . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 44: Attaching Wall-Mount Brackets to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 45: Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 46: Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 47: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 48: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 49: Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . 136
Figure 50: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 51: Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 52: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 53: Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a Four-Post
Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 54: Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC Power Supply
in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 55: Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in an EX3200
or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 56: DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 57: Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply in an
EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 58: Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply in an
EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
xiv Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures
Figure 59: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Figure 60: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 62: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Through
a Console Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 63: Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 65: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in
an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 66: LCD Panel in an EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 Switch . . . . 168
Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 67: Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . . 175
Figure 68: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 69: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 70: Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 71: Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch . . . . 179
Figure 72: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 73: Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Part 7 Returning Hardware

Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 74: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 Switch . . . . . 200
Figure 75: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . 201
Part 8 Safety Information

Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 76: Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xv

xvi Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Tables
Table 1: EX3200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table 2: EX4200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table 3: Physical Specifications of the EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . 7
Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 6: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 7: Link/Activity LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 8: Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . 24
Table 9: Link/Activity LED on the Management Port on EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 10: Status LED on the Management Port on EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 11: Minimum Power Requirements for an EX3200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 12: Minimum Power Requirements for an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 13: AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 14: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 15: Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 16: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . 41
Table 17: Management Port Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 18: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit
Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200
and EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers in
Table 21: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in
Table 22: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 23: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 24: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . . . . 81
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xvii


Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 25: Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 26: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 27: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 28: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 29: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 30: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 31: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 32: AC Power Cord Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Table 33: Inventory of Components Provided with an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 34: Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
xviii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

About This Topic Collection
• How to Use This Guide on page xix

• List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3 on page xix
• Downloading Software on page xxi
• Documentation Symbols Key on page xxii
• Documentation Feedback on page xxiii
• Requesting Technical Support on page xxiv
How to Use This Guide
Complete documentation for the EX Series product family is provided on webpages at

http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/en_US/release-independent/information-products/
pathway-pages/ex-series/product/index.html. We have selected content from these
webpages and created a number of EX Series guides that collect related topics into a
book-like format so that the information is easy to print and easy to download to your
local computer.
This guide, Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches, collects together
information about the EX3200 fixed-configuration and EX4200 virtual-chassis switches.
The release notes are at
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/en_US/junos10.3/information-products/topic-collections/
release-notes/10.3/junos-release-notes-10.3.pdf.
List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3
Title Description
Complete Hardware Guide for EX2200 Switches Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX2200 switches
Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
for EX3200 and EX4200 switches
for EX4500 switches
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xix

Title Description
for EX8208 switches
for EX8216 switches
®
Complete Software Guide for Junos OS for EX Series Switches, Release Software feature descriptions, configuration examples,
10.3 and tasks for Junos OS for EX Series switches
Software Topic Collections Software feature descriptions, configuration examples

and tasks, and reference pages for configuration
statements and operational commands (This
information also appears in the Complete Software
®
Guide for Junos OS for EX Series Switches, Release
10.3.)
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Access Control
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Configuration
Management
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Class of Service
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Device Security
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Ethernet Switching
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Interfaces
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Layer 3 Protocols
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: MPLS
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Multicast
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Network Management
and Monitoring
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Port Security
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Power Management
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Routing Policy and
Packet Filtering
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Software Installation
xx Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Title Description
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Spanning-Tree Protocols
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Monitoring
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Services
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Setup
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: User and Access
Management
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: User Interfaces
®
JUNOS OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Virtual Chassis
Downloading Software
You can download Junos OS for EX Series switches from the Download Software area
at http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/ . To download the software, you must
have a Juniper Networks user account. For information about obtaining an account, see
http://www.juniper.net/entitlement/setupAccountInfo.do.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxi

Documentation Symbols Key
Notice Icons
Icon Meaning Description
Informational note Indicates important features or instructions.
Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware

damage.
Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.
Laser warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
Text and Syntax Conventions
Convention Description Examples
Bold text like this Represents text that you type. To enter configuration mode, type the
configure command:
user@host> configure
Fixed-width text like this Represents output that appears on the user@host> show chassis alarms
terminal screen. No alarms currently active
Italic text like this • Introduces important new terms. • A policy term is a named structure that
• Identifies book names. defines match conditions and actions.
• Junos System Basics Configuration
• Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles.
Guide
• RFC 1997, BGP Communities Attribute
Italic text like this Represents variables (options for which Configure the machine’s domain name:
you substitute a value) in commands or
configuration statements. [edit]
root@# set system domain-name
domain-name
Plain text like this Represents names of configuration • To configure a stub area, include the
statements, commands, files, and stub statement at the [edit protocols
directories; IP addresses; configuration ospf area area-id] hierarchy level.
hierarchy levels; or labels on routing • The console port is labeled CONSOLE.
platform components.
< > (angle brackets) Enclose optional keywords or variables. stub <default-metric metric>;
xxii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Text and Syntax Conventions
Convention Description Examples
| (pipe symbol) Indicates a choice between the mutually broadcast | multicast

exclusive keywords or variables on either
side of the symbol. The set of choices is (string1 | string2 | string3)
often enclosed in parentheses for clarity.
# (pound sign) Indicates a comment specified on the rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only
same line as the configuration statement
to which it applies.
[ ] (square brackets) Enclose a variable for which you can community name members [
substitute one or more values. community-ids ]
Indention and braces ( { } ) Identify a level in the configuration [edit]

hierarchy. routing-options {
static {
route default {
nexthop address;
retain;
}
}
}
; (semicolon) Identifies a leaf statement at a

configuration hierarchy level.
J-Web GUI Conventions

Bold text like this Represents J-Web graphical user • In the Logical Interfaces box, select All
interface (GUI) items you click or select. Interfaces.
• To cancel the configuration, click
Cancel.
> (bold right angle bracket) Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Web In the configuration editor hierarchy,
selections. select Protocols>Ospf.
Documentation Feedback
We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can

improve the documentation. Send e-mail to techpubs-comments@juniper.net with the
following:
• Document URL or title
• Page number if applicable
• Software version
• Your name and company
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxiii

Requesting Technical Support
Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or JNASC support contract,
or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support, you can access
our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.
• JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,

review the JTAC User Guide located at
http://www.juniper.net/us/en/local/pdf/resource-guides/7100059-en.pdf .
• Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit

http://www.juniper.net/support/warranty/ .
• JTAC hours of operation—The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year.
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources

For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online
self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides you with the
following features:
• Find CSC offerings: http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/
• Search for known bugs: http://www2.juniper.net/kb/
• Find product documentation: http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/
• Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base: http://kb.juniper.net/
• Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:

http://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/software/
• Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:

https://www.juniper.net/alerts/
• Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:

http://www.juniper.net/company/communities/
• Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
To verify service entitlement by product serial number, use our Serial Number Entitlement
(SNE) Tool: https://tools.juniper.net/SerialNumberEntitlementSearch/
Opening a Case with JTAC

You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone.
• Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http://www.juniper.net/cm/ .
• Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).
For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see

http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html .
xxiv Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

PART 1
Switch and Components Overview and

Specifications
• EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview on page 3
• Component Descriptions on page 13
• Component Specifications on page 39
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. 1

2 Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

CHAPTER 1
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview
• EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

• EX3200 Switch Models on page 6
• Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 7
• Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 7
• Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview
Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches provide scalable connectivity for the
enterprise market, including branch offices, campus locations, and data centers. The
switches run under the Juniper Networks Junos operating system (Junos OS), which
provides Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching, routing, and security services. The same Junos
OS code base that runs on EX Series switches also runs on all Juniper Networks J Series,
M Series, MX Series, and T Series routers.
• EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Types on page 3

• EX3200 Switches on page 4
• EX4200 Switches on page 4
• Uplink Modules on page 5
• Power over Ethernet (PoE) Ports on page 5
EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Types

Juniper Networks EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches are two closely related product
lines:
• EX3200 switches—Typically, you deploy these switches in branch environments or

wiring closets.
• EX4200 switches—You can interconnect EX4200 switches to form a Virtual Chassis

that operates as a single network entity. You can deploy these switches wherever you
need a high density of Gigabit Ethernet ports (24 to 480 ports), redundancy, or the

ability to span a single switch across several wiring closets. Typically, EX4200 switches
are used in large branch offices, campus wiring closets, and top-of-rack locations in a
data center.
Both lines have these features:
• Run under Junos OS for EX Series switches
• Have options of 24-port and 48-port models
• Have options of full (all ports) or partial (8 ports) Power over Ethernet (PoE) capability
• Have optional uplink modules that provide connection to distribution switches
EX3200 Switches
EX3200 switches provide connectivity for low-density environments. Typically, you deploy
these switches in branch environments or wiring closets where only one switch is required.
EX3200 switches are available in models with either 24 or 48 ports and with either all
ports equipped for Power over Ethernet (PoE) or only 8 ports equipped for PoE. All models
provide ports that have 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet connectors and optional
1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, 10-gigabit small form-factor
pluggable (SFP+) transceivers, or 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP)
transceivers for use with fiber connections.
EX3200 switches include:
• A field-replaceable power supply and an optional additional connection to an external

power source.
• A field-replaceable fan tray with single fan.
• Junos OS with its modular design that enables failed system processes to gracefully
restart.
EX4200 Switches
EX4200 switches provide connectivity for medium- and high-density environments and
scalability for growing networks. These switches can be deployed wherever you need a
high density of Gigabit Ethernet ports (24 to 480 ports) or redundancy. Typically, EX4200
switches are used in large branch offices, campus wiring closets, and data centers where
they can be positioned as the top device in a rack to provide connectivity for all the devices
in the rack.
You can connect individual EX4200 switches together to form one unit and manage the
unit as a single chassis, called a Virtual Chassis. You can add more member switches to
the Virtual Chassis as needed, up to a total of 10 members.
EX4200 switches are available in models with 24 or 48 ports and with either all ports
equipped for Power over Ethernet (PoE) or only 8 ports equipped for PoE. All models
provide ports that have 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet connectors and optional
1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, 10-gigabit small form-factor

Chapter 1: EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview
pluggable (SFP+) transceivers, or 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP)

transceivers for use with fiber connections.
Additionally, a 24-port model provides 100Base-FX/1000Base-X SFP ports. This model

is typically used as a small distribution switch.
All EX4200 switches have dedicated 64-Gbps Virtual Chassis ports that allow you to
connect the switches to each other. You can also use optional uplink module ports to
connect members of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets.
To provide carrier-class reliability, EX4200 switches include:
• Dual redundant power supplies that are field-replaceable and hot-swappable. An

optional additional connection to an external power source is also available.
• A field-replaceable fan tray with three fans. The switch remains operational if a single
fan fails.
• Redundant Routing Engines in a Virtual Chassis configuration. This redundancy enables

GRES (graceful Routing Engine switchover) and nonstop active routing.
• Junos OS with its modular design that enables failed system processes to gracefully
restart.
Uplink Modules
Optional uplink modules are available for all EX3200 and EX4200 switches. Uplink
modules provide two 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) transceivers, four
1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, or two 10-gigabit small
form-factor pluggable (SFP+) transceivers. You can use XFP, SFP, or SFP+ ports to
connect an access switch to a distribution switch or to interconnect member switches
of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Ports

PoE ports provide electrical current to devices through the network cables so that separate
power cords for devices such as IP phones, wireless access points, and security cameras
are unnecessary. Both the EX3200 and EX4200 switches have options of full (all 24 or
48 ports) or partial (8 ports) PoE capability.
Full PoE models are primarily used in IP telephony environments. Partial PoE models are
used in environments where, for example, only a few ports for wireless access points or
security cameras are required.
Related Topics • EX3200 Switch Models on page 6
• Field-Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 18
• Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87

EX3200 Switch Models
The EX3200 switch is available with 24 or 48 ports with partial or full Power over Ethernet
(PoE) capability. Table 1 on page 6 lists the EX3200 switch models.
Table 1: EX3200 Switch Models
Number of Power Supply

Model Typical Deployment Access Ports PoE-enabled Ports (Minimum)
EX3200-24T Access or Distribution 24 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W
switch
EX3200-24P Access switch 24 Gigabit Ethernet All 24 ports 600 W
EX3200-48T Access or Distribution 48 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W

switch
EX3200-48P Access switch 48 Gigabit Ethernet All 48 ports 930 W
EX4200 Switch Models
The EX4200 switch is available with 24 or 48 ports and with partial or full Power over
Ethernet (PoE) capability. Table 2 on page 6 lists the EX4200 switch models.
Table 2: EX4200 Switch Models
Power Supply
Model Ports Number of PoE-enabled Ports (Minimum)
EX4200-24T 24 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W
EX4200-24P 24 Gigabit Ethernet All 24 ports 600 W
EX4200-48T 48 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W
EX4200-48P 48 Gigabit Ethernet All 48 ports 930 W
EX4200-24F 24 small form-factor pluggable Not applicable 320 W

(SFP) transceivers

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The EX3200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the
hardware components. Table 3 on page 7 summarizes the physical specifications of
the EX3200 and EX4200 switch chassis.
Table 3: Physical Specifications of the EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Chassis

Description Value
Chassis height 1.75 in. (4.45 cm)
Chassis width • 17.25 in. (43.82 cm)

• 19 in. (48.2 cm) with mounting brackets attached
Chassis depth • Without power supply installed—17 in. (43.18 cm)

• With power supply installed:
• 320 W AC power supply or 190 W DC power supply installed—17 in. (43.18 cm)
• 600 W or 930 W AC power supply installed—19.25 in. (48.9 cm)
Weight • EX3200 switch with 1 power supply: 15–17 lb (6.8–7.7 kg)

• EX4200 switch with 1 power supply: 16–18 lb (7.2–8.2 kg)
• 320 W AC power supply: 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)
• 600 W and 930 W AC power supplies: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
• 190 W DC power supply: 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)
Related Topics • Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 93
• Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 94
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 120
• Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 117
• Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on

page 131
Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch
The front panel of an EX3200 switch consists of the following components:
• 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet ports, some or all of which are enabled for Power
over Ethernet (PoE)
• Uplink module ports—SFP, SFP+, or XFP ports (The uplink module is an optional
feature.)

• LCD panel and the LCD navigation buttons
• Chassis status LEDs
• Network port LEDs
Figure 1 on page 8 shows the front panel of an EX3200 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet
ports. Figure 2 on page 8 shows the front panel of an EX3200 switch with 24 Gigabit
Ethernet ports. Models are available that have either all ports equipped for Power over
Ethernet (PoE) or only 8 ports equipped for PoE. All ports have 10/100/1000Base-T
Gigabit Ethernet connectors.
Figure 1: EX3200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
Related Topics • Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches on page 19
• Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 21
• Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on

page 40
• LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 13

page 131
• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 135
• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 177
Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch
The rear panel of the EX3200 switch consists of the following components:
• Protective earthing terminal
• Temperature shutdown LED

• Management Ethernet port
• Console port
• USB port
• ESD point
• Fan tray
• Power supply
Figure 3 on page 9 shows the rear panel of an EX3200 switch with a 320 W power
supply. All EX3200 switches have the same rear panel. The 320 W AC power supply and
the 190 W DC power supply are flush with the chassis. The 600 W AC power supply and
930 W AC power supply extend out of the chassis by 2.25 in. The power cord retainer
clips extend out of the power supply by 3 in.
Figure 3: EX3200 Switch Rear Panel
Related Topics • Field-Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 18
• USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 39
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31
• Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 27
• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236
• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141

page 131
Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch
The front panel of an EX4200 switch consists of the following components:
• Network ports—depending on the switch model, either of:

• 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet ports, some or all of which are enabled for
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
• 100Base-FX/1000Base-X SFP ports for use with fiber-optic connections
• Uplink module ports—SFP, SFP+, or XFP ports (The uplink module is an optional
feature.)
• LCD panel and the LCD navigation buttons
• Chassis status LEDs
• Network port LEDs
Figure 4 on page 10 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet
ports. Figure 5 on page 10 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 24 Gigabit
Ethernet ports. Figure 6 on page 10 shows the front panel of an EX4200-24F switch with
24 SFP ports for use with fiber-optic connectors.
Figure 6: EX4200-24F Switch with 24 SFP Ports
Related Topics • Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 20
• Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on

page 40

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43

page 131
Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch
The rear panel of the EX4200 switch consists of the following components:
• Fan tray
• Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs)
• USB port
• Temperature shutdown LED
• Management Ethernet port
• Console port
• ESD point
• Power supply or power supplies
Figure 7 on page 11 shows the rear panel of an EX4200 switch. All EX4200 switches
have the same rear panel. The 320 W AC power supply and the 190 W DC are flush with
the chassis. The 600 W AC power supply and 930 W AC power supply extend out of the
chassis by 2.25 in. Power cord retainer clips extend out of the power supply by 3 in.
Figure 7: EX4200 Switch Rear Panel

Temperature ESD Protective earthing
shutdown LED point terminal (on side panel)
g020084
Fan Virtual USB Management Console Power Power

tray chassis port Ethernet port Supply 1 Supply 0
ports port


page 131
• Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on

page 105

CHAPTER 2
Component Descriptions

• Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches on page 19
• Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 20
• Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 25
• AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 30
• DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 30
• Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 34
LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The LCD panel on the front panel of EX3200 and EX4200 switches shows two lines of
text, each a maximum of 16 characters in length. The LCD panel displays a variety of
information about the switch and also provides a menu to perform basic operations such
as initial setup and reboot.
There are two navigation buttons—Menu and Enter—to the right of the LCD panel.
See Figure 8 on page 13.
Figure 8: LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
You can configure the second line of the LCD panel to display a custom message. If the
LCD panel is configured to display a custom message, the Menu button and the Enter
button are disabled. See Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).

The LCD panel has a backlight. If the LCD panel is idle for 60 seconds, the backlight turns
off. You can turn on the backlight by pressing the Menu or Enter button once. After turning
on the backlight, you can toggle between the LCD panel menus by pressing the Menu
button and navigate through the menu options by pressing the Enter button.
NOTE: The chassis viewer in the J-Web interface also displays the LCD panel. From the
J-Web interface, you can view real-time status information in the LCD panel. See
Dashboard for EX Series Switches.
This topic describes:
• LCD Panel Modes on page 14

• LCD Panel Menus on page 15
LCD Panel Modes

The LCD panel operates in four modes: boot, idle, status, and maintenance.
The LCD panel operates in boot mode during switch reboot. The boot mode displays the
key milestones in the switch boot process. The boot mode does not have any menu
options. After the boot process is complete, the LCD panel automatically reverts to the
Idle menu.
In an EX3200 switch, the first line of the LCD panel displays the hostname.
In an EX4200 switch that is not a member of a Virtual Chassis, the first line of the LCD
panel displays the slot number, the role of the switch, and hostname. For a standalone
EX4200 switch, the slot number is always 00 and the role is always RE (for master).
In an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis, the first line of the LCD panel
displays:
• The slot number (the member ID for the Virtual Chassis member)
• Role of the switch in a Virtual Chassis (RE for master, BK for backup, and LC for linecard
member)
• Hostname
In the idle mode, the second line displays the mode of the network ports’ Status LED and
the number of chassis alarms. The number of alarms is updated every second.
In the status mode, the second line displays:
• Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status (for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual
Chassis)
• Status of the power supply
• Status of the fan and temperature
• Version of Junos OS for EX Series switches loaded on the switch

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
In the maintenance mode, the second line displays one of the following options that you
can use to configure and troubleshoot the switch:
• System halt
• System reboot
• Load rescue
• Request VC port (for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis)
• Factory default
• System EZSetup
LCD Panel Menus

The LCD panel has three menus: Idle, Status, and Maintenance. Toggle between the LCD
panel menus by pressing the Menu button. Navigate through the menu options by pressing
the Enter button.
Table 4 on page 15 describes the LCD panel menu options.
Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches

Menu Description
IDLE In the Idle menu:
• Press Enter to cycle through the Status LED modes:

• ADM (administrative status)
• DPX (duplex)
• Power over Ethernet (PoE)
• SPD (speed)
See “Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 21 for information on the Status LED
modes.
• Press Menu to exit the Idle menu and go to the Status menu.

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches (continued)
Menu Description
STATUS The Status menu has the following options:
• Show VCP status—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to display the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status: Up, Down, Disabled. This menu
option is available only for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis configuration.
• Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Status menu.
• Show PSU status—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to display the status of the power supply: OK, Failed, Absent.
• Show Environment status—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to display the status of the fan and temperature:
• Fan status: OK, Failed, Absent

• Temp status: OK, High, Shutdown
• Show Junos version—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to version of Junos OS for EX Series switches loaded on the switch.
• EXIT STAT MENU?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to exit the Status menu. Then press the Menu button to go to the Maintenance
menu.
• Press the Menu button to return to the Show VCP status option.
If you do not want users to use Status menu options, disable the entire menu or individual menu options. See
Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches (continued)
Menu Description
MAINT The Maintenance menu has the following options to configure and troubleshoot the switch:
(Maintenance
Menu) • SYSTEM HALT?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to halt the switch. Press the Enter button again to confirm the halt.
• Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
• SYSTEM REBOOT?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to reboot the switch. Press the Enter button again to confirm the reboot.
• LOAD RESCUE?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to roll back the switch to the rescue configuration. Press the Enter button again
to confirm the rollback.
• REQUEST VC PORT?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to configure an uplink module port or an EX4200-24F network port to be a Virtual
Chassis port (VCP) or to delete a VCP from the switch configuration (when you delete the VCP, the port
is reset to an uplink module port or an EX4200-24F network port).
• FACTORY DEFAULT?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to restore the switch to the factory default configuration. Press the Enter button
again to confirm the restoration.
• ENTER EZSETUP?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to launch EZSetup. Press the Enter button again to confirm the launch.
NOTE: You can use the ENTER EZSETUP option only if the switch is in the factory default configuration.
For information about EZSetup, see “Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)”
on page 167.
• EXIT MAINT MENU?—Choose one of the following:
• Press the Enter button to exit the Maintenance menu. Then press the Menu button to go to the Idle menu.
• Press the Menu button to go to the System Halt option.
If you do not want users to use Maintenance menu options, disable the entire menu or individual menu options.
See Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).
Related Topics • Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 7
• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 165
• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 167

Field-Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are components that you can replace at your site. The
field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX3200 and EX4200 switches are:
• Power supply
• Fan tray
• Uplink module
• SFP transceiver
• SFP+ transceiver
• XFP transceiver
NOTE: Uplink modules are not part of the standard package and must be ordered
separately.
The power supply, fan tray, uplink module, and transceivers are hot-removable and
hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or
disrupting switch functions.
NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or
upgrade of hardware components at
https://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp. Failure to
do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note applies
if you change the type of power supply or add a new type of uplink module. It does not
apply if you replace these components with the same type of component.
Related Topics • Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 34
• Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132
• Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133
• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 176
• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 137
• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 179

Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches
The front panel of an EX3200 switch has three LEDs on the far right side of the panel,
next to the LCD panel (see Figure 9 on page 19).
Figure 9: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch
Table 5 on page 19 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX3200 switch, their colors
and states, and the status they indicate. You can view the colors of the three LEDs
remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis lcd.
Table 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch

LED Label Color State and Description
ALM (Alarm) Unlit There is no alarm.
Red There is a major alarm.
Amber There is a minor alarm.
SYS (System) Green • On steadily—Junos OS for EX Series switches has been

loaded on the switch.
• Blinking—The switch is booting.
MST (Master) Green This LED is always on and is meaningful only on EX4200
switches.
A major alarm (red) indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action.
A minor alarm (amber) indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or

maintenance. A minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or
performance degradation.
NOTE: The amber glow of the Alarm LED that indicates a minor alarm closely resembles
the red glow that indicates a major alarm.
All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously.
• Checking Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface
• Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches

Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches
The front panel of an EX4200 switch has three LEDs on the far right side of the panel,
next to the LCD panel (see Figure 10 on page 20).
Figure 10: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch
Table 6 on page 20 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX4200 switch, their colors
and states, and the status they indicate. You can view the colors of the three LEDs
remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis lcd.
Table 6: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch

LED Label Color State and Description
ALM (Alarm) Unlit There is no alarm.
Red There is a major alarm.
Amber There is a minor alarm.
SYS (System) Green • On steadily—Junos OS for EX Series switches has been

loaded on the switch.
• Blinking—The switch is booting.
MST (Master) Green • On steadily—The switch is the master in the Virtual Chassis
configuration.
• Blinking—The switch is the backup in the Virtual Chassis
configuration.
• Off—The switch is a linecard member in the Virtual Chassis
configuration.
A major alarm (red) indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action.
A minor alarm (amber) indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or

maintenance. A minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or
performance degradation.
NOTE: The amber glow of the Alarm LED that indicates a minor alarm closely resembles
the red glow that indicates a major alarm.
All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously.

• Checking Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface
• Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches
Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Each network port on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch has two LEDs. The four figures in
this topic show the location of those LEDs:
• Figure 11 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the network ports on the front
panel.
• Figure 12 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the
SFP uplink module.
SFP+ uplink module.
XFP uplink module.
Figure 11: LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel
Figure 12: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module

Figure 13: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP+ Uplink Module
Figure 14: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module
Status LED Status LED
g020108
Port 0 Port 1
Link/Activity Link/Activity
LED LED
The LEDs labeled Link/Activity LED in Figure 11 on page 21, Figure 12 on page 21, Figure
14 on page 22, and Figure 13 on page 22 indicate link activity. The LEDs labeled Status
LED in Figure 11 on page 21, Figure 12 on page 21, Figure 14 on page 22, and Figure 13 on
page 22 indicate the status of one of the four port parameters. The port parameters are
administrative status, duplex mode, Power over Ethernet (PoE) status, and speed.
Table 7 on page 22 describes the Link/Activity LED.
Table 7: Link/Activity LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches

LED Color State and Description
Link/Activity Green • Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is link
activity.
• On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no
link activity.
• Off—The port is not active.

Table 8 on page 24 describes the Status LED. From the Idle menu of the LCD, use the
Enter button on the LCD panel to toggle between the ADM, DPX, POE, and SPD indicators.

Table 8: Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches

LED LCD Indicator State and Description
Status LED: ADM Indicates the administrative status (enabled or disabled). The
status indicators are:
• Green—Administrative status enabled.

• Unlit—Administrative status disabled.
LED: DPX Indicates the duplex mode.
The uplink module ports are always set to full-duplex;

therefore, the LED is always green.
The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are:
• Green—Port is set to full-duplex mode.

• Unlit—Port is set to half-duplex mode.
LED: POE Indicates the PoE status.
PoE is not enabled on uplink module ports; therefore, the LED

for those ports is always unlit.
The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are:
• Green—PoE is enabled on the port.

• Amber—PoE is enabled on the port, but no power is drawn
from the port because of one of the following:
• No device that draws power from the port is connected
to the port.
• A device that draws power from the port is connected to
the port, but the device is not drawing any power from
the port.
• Unlit—PoE is not enabled on the port.
LED: SPD

Table 8: Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches (continued)
LED LCD Indicator State and Description
Indicates the speed.
The speed indicators for network ports on the front panel are:
• One blink per second—10 Mbps

• Two blinks per second—100 Mbps
• Three blinks per second—1000 Mbps
The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP uplink

module are:
• Green—1000 Mbps
• Unlit—10/100 Mbps
The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP+ uplink

module are:
• Green—The speed of the transceiver installed in the port is

the same as the speed at which the uplink module port is
configured to operate.
• Unlit—The speed of the transceiver installed in the port is
not the same as the speed at which the uplink module port
is configured to operate.
The speed of the XFP uplink module ports is always 10 Gbps;

therefore, the LED is always green.
Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The management port on EX3200 and EX4200 switches has two LEDs that indicate
link/activity and port status (see Figure 15 on page 26 or Figure 16 on page 26). The
management port is set to full-duplex and the speed is set to 100 Mbps.

Figure 15: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX3200 Switch
Figure 16: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX4200 Switch
Table 9 on page 26 describes the Link/Activity LED.
Table 9: Link/Activity LED on the Management Port on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Link/Activity Green • Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is link
activity.
• On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no
link activity.
• Off—The port is not active.
Table 10 on page 26 describes the Status LED (administrative status).
Table 10: Status LED on the Management Port on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Status Green • On steadily—Administrative status is enabled.

• Off—Administrative status is disabled.
Related Topics • See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 for port location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for port location.
• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 152

Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches (see Figure 17 on page 28, Figure 18
on page 28 and Figure 19 on page 28) is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU) that you can install on the rear panel without powering off
the switch or disrupting the switching function. EX4200 switches have an internal
redundant power supply, making the power supply in EX4200 switches fully redundant.
The power supply in EX3200 switches is not redundant.
EX3200 and EX4200 switches use power that provides two DC output voltages: 12 V for
system and logic power and 48–51 V (or higher, to compensate for voltage drops along
the path from the power supplies to the RJ-45 connector) for PoE ports.
The AC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is available in 320 W, 600 W,
and 930 W models. The exterior of the 600 W model is identical to that of the 930 W
model. The 320 W power supply is flush with the chassis. The 600 W power supply and
930 W power supply extend out of the chassis by 2.25 in. The power cord retainer clips
extend out of the power supply by 3 in. The number of ports on which PoE is enabled
determines the minimum power requirements.
The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is available in a 190 W model,
with dual input feeds for power resiliency. You can install redundant DC power supplies
in an EX4200 switch to achieve both power supply and power feed resiliency.
NOTE: The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches does not support Power
over Ethernet (PoE); you can use either an external power injector or an AC power supply
to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch.
NOTE: The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches has four terminals labeled
A+, B+, A–, and B– (see Figure 19 on page 28) for connecting DC power source cables
labeled positive (+) and negative (–). The DC power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200
switches are shipped with jumpers from A+ input to B+ input tied together and jumpers
from A– input to B– input tied together.
NOTE: The A+ and B+ terminals are referred to as +RTN and A– and B– terminals are
referred to as –48 V in “DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches”
on page 244 and “DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches” on
page 240.

Figure 17: 320 W AC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Figure 18: 600 W and 930 W AC Power Supplies in EX3200 and EX4200
Switches
Figure 19: DC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Table 11 on page 28 lists the minimum power requirements for each model of EX3200
switch. The maximum power available to each PoE port is 15.4 W.
Table 11: Minimum Power Requirements for an EX3200 Switch

Model Number Number of PoE-enabled Ports Minimum Power Requirement
EX3200-24T 8 320 W

Table 11: Minimum Power Requirements for an EX3200 Switch (continued)

EX3200-48T 8 320 W
EX3200-24P 24 600 W
EX3200-48P 48 930 W
EX3200-24T-DC 0 190 W
EX3200-48T-DC 0 190 W
Table 12 on page 29 lists the minimum power requirements for each model of EX4200
switch. The maximum power available to each PoE port is 15.4 W.
Table 12: Minimum Power Requirements for an EX4200 Switch

EX4200-24T 8 320 W
EX4200-48T 8 320 W
EX4200-24P 24 600 W
EX4200-48P 48 930 W
EX4200-24F – 320 W
EX4200-24T-DC 0 190 W
EX4200-48T-DC 0 190 W
EX4200-24F-DC – 190 W
To avoid electrical injury, follow instructions in “Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200

or EX4200 Switch” on page 132 and “Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or
EX4200 Switch” on page 174 carefully.
NOTE: After powering on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, wait for at least 60 seconds
before powering it off. After powering off an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, wait for at least
60 seconds before powering it back on.
After an EX3200 or EX4200 switch has been powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds
for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power supply, show chassis command output,
and messages on the LCD—to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally.
Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds.

Related Topics • AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 102
• Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 101
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 147
• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 149
AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The AC power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is on the rear panel. Table 13 on
page 30 describes the LEDs on the AC power supplies in EX3200 and EX4200 switches.
Table 13: AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches

LED State and Description
AC OK • Off—Disconnected from power or power is not coming into

the power supply.
• On—Power is coming into the power supply.
DC OK • Off—Power supply is not sending out power correctly.

• On—Power supply is sending out power correctly.
NOTE: If the AC OK LED and the DC OK LED are unlit, either the AC power cord is not
installed properly or the power supply fuse has failed. If the AC OK LED is lit and the DC
OK LED is unlit, the AC power supply is not installed properly or the power supply has
an internal failure.
Related Topics • Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 27
DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The DC power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is on the rear panel. Table 14 on
page 31 describes the LEDs on the DC power supplies in EX3200 and EX4200 switches.

Table 14: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches

LED Label Color Description
LED A Red Inputs A and B are normal, but there is no output.
LED B Red
LED A Green Inputs A and B are normal; output is normal.
LED B Green
LED A Flash Red Input A has failed because the power supply fuse has failed,
input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection; output is
normal.
LED B Green
LED A Green Input B has failed because the power supply fuse has failed,
input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection; output is
normal.
LED B Flash Red
LED A Flash Red Both inputs have failed because the power supply fuse has
failed, input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection;
output is normal.
LED B Flash Red
LED A Off There is no input; there is no output.
LED B Off
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch
The cooling system in an EX3200 switch consists of a field-replaceable unit (FRU) fan
tray with one fan (see Figure 20 on page 32). The fan tray is located at the rear of the
chassis and provides side-to-rear chassis cooling (see Figure 21 on page 32).

Figure 20: Fan Tray Used in an EX3200 Switch
Figure 21: Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis
Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis. The
system raises an alarm if the fan fails or if the temperature inside the chassis rises above
permitted levels. If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold, the
system shuts down automatically and the temperature shutdown LED on the rear panel
is lit. You can see the status of fans and the temperature from the Show Environment
Status option in the Status menu in the LCD panel.

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch
The cooling system in an EX4200 switch consists of a field-replaceable unit (FRU) fan
tray with three fans (see Figure 22 on page 33). The fan tray is located at the rear of the
chassis and provides side-to-rear chassis cooling (see Figure 23 on page 33).
Figure 22: Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch
The fan tray used in an EX4200 switch comes with load-sharing redundancy that can
tolerate a single fan failure at room temperature (below 45° C/113° F) to still provide
sufficient cooling.
Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis. The
system raises an alarm if the fan fails or if the temperature inside the chassis rises above
permitted levels. If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold, the

system shuts down automatically and the temperature shutdown LED on the rear panel
is lit. You can see the status of fans and the temperature from the Show Environment
Status option in the Status menu in the LCD panel.
Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
EX3200 and EX4200 switches support three types of uplink modules:
• SFP uplink module—Provides four ports for 1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
transceivers.
• SFP+ uplink module—Provides two ports for 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable
(SFP+) transceivers when configured to operate in 10-gigabit mode or four ports for
1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers when configured to operate
in 1-gigabit mode.
• XFP uplink module—Provides two ports for 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable
(XFP) transceivers.
NOTE: When a new uplink module is installed in the switch or an existing uplink module
is replaced with another uplink module, the switch detects the newly installed uplink
module. The switch creates the required interfaces if the uplink module has transceivers
in its ports and when new transceivers are installed in those ports.
You can use the optional uplink module ports to connect an access switch to a distribution
switch. You can also use these ports to connect members of a Virtual Chassis across
multiple wiring closets.
When connecting uplink module ports, you can install an SFP uplink module at one end
of the connection and install an SFP+ uplink module configured to operate in the 1-gigabit
mode at the other end. Likewise, you can install an XFP uplink module at one end of the
connection and install an SFP+ uplink module configured to operate in the 10-gigabit
mode at the other end.
• SFP Uplink Module on page 35

• SFP+ Uplink Module on page 35
• XFP Uplink Module on page 37

SFP Uplink Module

Figure 24 on page 35 shows the SFP uplink module, which provides four ports for 1-gigabit
SFP transceivers.
Figure 24: SFP Uplink Module
SFP uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports.
NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in an SFP uplink module, a

corresponding network port from the last four built-in ports is disabled. For example,
if you install an SFP transceiver in port 2 on the uplink module (ge-0/1/3), then ge-0/0/23
is disabled. The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands.
The SFP uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or later.
SFP+ Uplink Module

SFP+ uplink modules can be used for either SFP+ or SFP transceivers. You configure the
operating mode on the module to match the type of transceiver you want to use—for
SFP+ transceivers, you configure the 10-gigabit operating mode, and for SFP transceivers,
you configure the 1-gigabit operating mode. See Setting the Mode on an SFP+ Uplink
Module (CLI Procedure).
By default, the SFP+ uplink module operates in the 10-gigabit mode and supports only
SFP+ transceivers. If you have not changed the module from the default setting and you
want to use SFP+ transceivers, you do not need to configure the operating mode.
If the operating mode and the configured mode for an SFP+ uplink module are different,
it is shown in the output of show chassis pic fpc-slot slot number pic-slot 1.
Figure 25 on page 36 shows the SFP+ uplink module.

Figure 25: SFP+ Uplink Module
Transceivers are supported in the uplink module’s ports as follows:
• SFP+ transceivers are supported in ports 0 and 2.
• SFP transceivers are supported in all four ports.
The ports that support SFP+ transceivers are labeled 10 G on the uplink module’s
faceplate (see Figure 25 on page 36).
NOTE: When an SFP+ uplink module is operating in 10-gigabit mode:

• Only the 10-gigabit ports (ports 0 and 2) are enabled.
• You can use only SFP+ transceivers in those ports.
When an SFP+ uplink module is operating in 1-gigabit mode:
• All four ports are enabled.
• You can use only SFP transceivers in all four ports.
The SFP+ uplink module has an LED on the faceplate (labeled Operating mode LED in
Figure 25 on page 36) that indicates the operating mode. If the uplink module is operating
in the 10-gigabit mode, the LED is lit. If the uplink module is operating in the 1-gigabit
mode, the LED is unlit.
SFP+ uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports.
NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in an SFP+ uplink module when
the uplink module is operating in the 1-gigabit mode, a corresponding network port from
the last four built-in ports is disabled. For example, if you install an SFP+ transceiver in
port 2 on the uplink module (ge-0/1/3), then ge-0/0/23 is disabled. The disabled port
is not listed in the output of show interface commands.

The SFP+ uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later.
XFP Uplink Module

Figure 26 on page 37 shows the XFP uplink module, which provides two ports for 10-gigabit
XFP transceivers.
Figure 26: XFP Uplink Module

Status LED Status LED
g020108
Port 0 Port 1
Link/Activity Link/Activity
LED LED
XFP uplink modules are shipped with a dust cover preinstalled in one port.
The XFP uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or later.
Related Topics • Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 21
• Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on
page 73
• SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches on page 69
• Example: Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High-Speed Uplinks Between a Virtual

Chassis Access Switch and a Virtual Chassis Distribution Switch
• Example: Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High-Speed Uplinks with LACP Between

a Virtual Chassis Access Switch and a Virtual Chassis Distribution Switch
• Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200

Switches on page 194


CHAPTER 3
Component Specifications

• Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch on page 40
• Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 41
• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch on page 42
• SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches on page 69
• Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches on page 73
• Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 81
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch
The following Juniper Networks USB flash drives have been tested and are officially
supported for the USB port on all EX Series switches:
• RE-USB-1G-S
• RE-USB-2G-S
• RE-USB-4G-S
CAUTION: Any USB memory product not listed as supported for EX Series switches
has not been tested by Juniper Networks. The use of any unsupported USB memory
product could expose your EX Series switch to unpredictable behavior. Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) can provide only limited support for issues related
to unsupported hardware. We strongly recommend that you use only supported USB
flash drives.
All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features:
• USB 2.0 or later.
• Formatted with a FAT or MS-DOS file system.

• If the switch is running Junos OS Release 9.5 or earlier, the formatting method must
use a master boot record. Windows formatting, by default, does not use a master boot
record. See the documentation for your USB flash drive for information on how your
USB flash drive is formatted.
Related Topics • See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location.
• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.
• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch for port
location.
• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
• Booting an EX Series Switch Using a Software Package Stored on a USB Flash Drive
Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
A network port on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to

a device.
The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100/1000Base-T

connection. Two LEDs on the port indicate link/activity on the port and the port status.
See “Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 21.
Table 15 on page 40 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45
cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.
Table 15: Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Pin Signal Description
1 TRP1+ Transmit/receive data pair 1
Negative Vport (in PoE models)
2 TRP1- Transmit/receive data pair 1
Negative Vport (in PoE models)
Positive Vport (in PoE models)
Positive Vport (in PoE models)

Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 15: Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch (continued)
Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch
The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a console management device. The default baud rate for the
console port is 9600 baud.
Table 16 on page 41 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 console connector.
An RJ-45 cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.
NOTE: If your laptop or PC does not have a DB-9 male connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the
RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter.
You must provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.
Table 16: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information

1 RTS Output Request to send
2 DTR Output Data terminal ready
3 TxD Output Transmit data
4 Signal Ground Signal ground
5 Signal Ground Signal ground
6 RxD Input Receive data
7 CD Input Data carrier detect
8 CTS Input Clear to send
Related Topics • See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.
• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch for port
location.
• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 153
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
The management port on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch uses an RJ-45 connector to

connect to a management device for out-of-band management.
The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100/1000Base-T

connection. Two LEDs on the port indicate link/activity on the port and the administrative
status of the port. See “Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on
page 25.
Table 17 on page 42 provides the pinout information of the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45
cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.
Table 17: Management Port Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Related Topics • See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 for port location.

Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optional uplink modules for EX3200 and EX4200 switches support SFP, SFP+, or XFP
transceivers. This topic describes the optical interfaces supported for those transceivers.
It also lists the copper interface supported for the SFP transceivers.
NOTE: Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper
Networks for your EX Series switch.
The Gigabit Ethernet SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceivers installed in EX3200 or EX4200
switches support digital optical monitoring (DOM): you can view the diagnostic details
for these transceivers by issuing the operational mode CLI command show interfaces
diagnostics optics. The command does not give any output for copper transceivers, Fast
Ethernet transceivers, or transceivers not purchased from Juniper Networks.
The tables in this topic describe the optical interface support over single-mode fiber-optic
(SMF) and multimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables for SFP, SFP+, and XFP transceivers
and over the copper interface for SFP transceivers:
• Table 18 on page 44—Optical interface support and copper interface support for Gigabit
Ethernet SFP transceivers.
• Table 19 on page 55—Optical interface support for Fast Ethernet SFP transceivers.
• Table 20 on page 61—Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ transceivers.
• Table 21 on page 66—Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP transceivers.

Table 18: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP
Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Ethernet Standard Specifications
1000Base-T Model Number EX-SFP-1GE-T
Rate 10/100/1000 Mbps
Connector Type RJ-45
Fiber Count Copper
Transmitter Wavelength –
Minimum Launch Power –
Maximum Launch Power –
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity –
Maximum Input Power –
Fiber Type Copper
Core/Cladding Size –
Modal Bandwidth –
Distance 100 m (328 ft)
DOM Support Not available
Software required Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or later

Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches (continued)
1000Base-SX Model Number EX-SFP-1GE-SX
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Transmitter Wavelength 850 nm
Minimum Launch Power –9.5 dBm
Maximum Launch Power –3 dBm
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity –21 dBm
Maximum Input Power 0 dBm
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125 µm 62.5/125 µm 50/125 µm 50/125 µm
Fiber Grade FDDI OM1 – OM2
Modal Bandwidth 160 MHz/km 200 MHz/km 400 MHz/km 500 MHz/km
Distance 220 m 275 m 500 m 550 m

(722 ft) (902 ft) (1640 ft) (1804 ft)
DOM Support Available

1000Base-LX Model Number EX-SFP-1GE-LX
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Maximum Input Power –3 dBm
Fiber Type SMF
Core/Cladding Size 9/125 µm
Modal Bandwidth –
Distance 10 km (6.2 miles)

1000Base-BX-U Model Number EX-SFP-GE10KT13R14
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Receiver Wavelength 1490 nm
Minimum Launch Power –9 dBm
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

1000Base-BX-D Model Number EX-SFP-GE10KT14R13
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Maximum Launch Power 2 dBm
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

1000Base-LX Model Number EX-SFP-1GE-LX40K
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

1000Base-LH (or Model Number EX-SFP-1GE-LH

1000Base-ZX)
Rate 1000 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200
Switches
100Base-FX Model Number EX-SFP-1FE-FX
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity –32.5 dBm
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125 µm
Fiber Grade FDDI/OM1
Modal Bandwidth 500 Mhz/km

Switches (continued)
100Base-LX Model Number EX-SFP-1FE-LX
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

100Base-BX-U Model Number EX-SFP-FE20KT13R15
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

100Base-BX-D Model Number EX-SFP-FE20KT15R13
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Single
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

100Base-LX40K Model Number EX-SFP-1FE-LX40K
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

100Base-LH (or Model Number EX-SFP-1FE-LH

100Base-ZX)
Rate 100 Mbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers in EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches
10GBase-SR Model Number EX-SFP-10GE-USR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Maximum Launch Power –1.3 dBm
Maximum Input Power –9.9 dBm
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125 50/125 50/125 µm

µm µm
Fiber Grade OM1 OM3 OM3
Modal Bandwidth 200 500 1500

MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km
Distance 10 m 30 m 100 m
(32.8 ft) (98.4 ft) (328 ft)

EX4200 Switches (continued)
10GBase-SR Model Number EX-SFP-10GE-SR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125 62.5/125 50/125 µm 50/125 50/125 µm

µm µm µm
Fiber Grade FDDI OM1 – OM2 OM3
Modal Bandwidth 160 200 400 500 1500

MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km
Distance 26 m 33 m 66 m 82 m 300 m
(85 ft) (108 ft) (216 ft) (269 ft) (984 ft)

10GBase-LRM Model Number EX-SFP-10GE-LRM
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Maximum Launch Power 0.5 dBm
Maximum Input Power 0.5 dBm
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125µm 50/125 µm 50/125 µm
Fiber Grade FDDI/OM1 OM2 OM3
Modal Bandwidth 500 500 500

MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km
Distance 220 m 220 m 220 m

(722 ft) (722 ft) (722 ft)

10GBase-LR Model Number EX-SFP-10GE-LR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Maximum Launch Power 0.5 dBm
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

10GBase-ER Model Number EX-SFP-10GE-ER
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

Table 21: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200
Switches
10GBase-SR Model Number EX-XFP-10GE-SR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Maximum Launch Power –1.3 dBm
Fiber Type MMF
Core/Cladding Size 62.5/125 62.5/125 50/125 µm 50/125 50/125 µm

µm µm µm
Fiber Grade FDDI OM1 – OM2 OM3
Modal Bandwidth 160 200 400 500 1500

MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km MHz/km
Distance 26 m 33 m 66 m 82 m 300 m
(85 ft) (108 ft) (216 ft) (269 ft) (984 ft)

10GBase-LR Model Number EX-XFP-10GE-LR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

10GBase-ER Model Number EX-XFP-10GE-ER
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –

10GBase-ZR Model Number EX-XFP-10GE-ZR
Rate 10 Gbps
Connector Type LC
Fiber Count Dual
Minimum Launch Power 0
Fiber Type SMF
Modal Bandwidth –
SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches
Small form-factor pluggable plus transceiver (SFP+) direct attach copper cables, also
known as Twinax cables, are suitable for in-rack connections between servers and
switches. They are suitable for short distances up to 7 m, making them ideal for highly
cost-effective networking connectivity within a rack and between adjacent racks.

• Cable Specifications on page 70

• Standards Supported by These Cables on page 73
Cable Specifications
Juniper Networks SFP+ direct attach cables are available in four lengths:
• 1 m (3.3 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
• 3 m (9.9 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
• 5 m (16.4 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, and EX8200 switches
• 7 m (23 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
NOTE: When you use SFP+ direct attach cables with your EX Series switches, we
recommend that you use only Juniper Networks SFP+ direct attach cables.
The cables are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them
without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. A cable comprises a
low-voltage cable assembly that connects directly into two SFP+ modules, one at each
end of the cable. The cables use high-performance integrated duplex serial data links
for bidirectional communication and are designed for data rates up to 10 Gbps.
Table 22 on page 71 describes the cable specifications.

Table 22: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications

Model Specification
EX-SFP-10GE-DAC-1m Rate 10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmission
Connector type SFP+ passive Twinax cable assembly
Supply voltage 3.3 V
Power consumption (per end) 0.57 W
° °
Storage temperature -40 C to 85 C
Cable type Twinax
Wire AWG 30 AWG
Minimum cable bend radius 1 in.
Cable characteristic impedance 100 ohms
Crosstalk between pairs 2% maximum
Time delay 1.31 nsec/ft
Length 1 m (3.3 ft)
° °
Cable type Twinax
Wire AWG 30 AWG
Length 3 m (9.9 ft)

Table 22: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications (continued)

Model Specification
° °
Cable type Twinax
Wire AWG 24 AWG
Length 5 m (16.4 ft)
° °
Cable type Twinax
Wire AWG 24 AWG
Length 7 m (23 ft)

Standards Supported by These Cables

The cables comply with the following standards:
• SFP mechanical standard SFF-843—see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8431.PDF.
• Electrical interface standard SFF-8432—see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8432.PDF.
• SFP+ Multi-Source Alliance (MSA) standards
Related Topics • Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43
• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
EX3200 and EX4200 switches have a field-replaceable unit (FRU) uplink module on the
front panel. Table 23 on page 73 provides the uplink modules connector pinout
information.
NOTE: You can use these ports to connect an access switch to a distribution switch.
You can also use optional uplink module ports to connect members of a Virtual Chassis
across multiple wiring closets.
Table 23: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Pin Number Pin Name
A1 GND
A2 GND
A3 GND
A4 GND
A5 GND
A6 GND
A7 GND
A8 GND
A9 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
A10 GND
A11 GND
A12 GND
A13 GND
A14 GND
A15 Uplink_I2C_SCK
A16 GND
A17 Uplink_PD
A18 GND
A19 POWER (12V)
A20 GND
B1 GND
B2 XAUI0_RX0N
B3 GND
B4 XAUI0_RX2N
B5 Uplink_P25_LED2
B6 XAUI1_RX0N
B7 Uplink_P27_LED2
B8 XAUI1_RX2N
B9 GND
B10 SRX28N
B11 Uplink_XAUI_XMDIO
B12 SRX26N

Pin Number Pin Name
B13 GND
B14 SGMIIRXN
B15 Uplink_I2C_Rst
B16 Uplink_Intr
B17 Uplink_Pwr_En
B18 Uplink_P26_LED0
B19 POWER (12V)
B20 POWER (12V)
C1 GND
C2 XAUI0_RX0P
C3 GND
C4 XAUI0_RX2P
C5 GND
C6 XAUI1_RX0P
C7 GND
C8 XAUI1_RX2P
C9 GND
C10 SRX28P
C11 GND
C12 SRX26P
C13 GND
C14 SGMIIRXP
C15 CPU_UPLINK_MDC

Pin Number Pin Name
C16 Uplink_I2C_SDA
C17 CPU_UPLINK_MDIO
C18 Uplink_P26_LED1
C19 UPLNK_PWR_OK
C20 POWER (12V)
D1 GND
D2 GND
D3 XAUI0_TX1N
D4 GND
D5 XAUI0_TX3N
D6 GND
D7 XAUI1_TX1N
D8 GND
D9 XAUI1_TX3N
D10 GND
D11 STX27N
D12 GND
D13 STX25N
D14 GND
D15 Uplink_Rst
D16 GND
D17 Uplink_Status_LED0
D18 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
D19 POWER (12V)
D20 GND
E1 GND
E2 XAUI0_TX0N
E3 XAUI0_TX1P
E4 XAUI0_TX2N
E5 XAUI0_TX3P
E6 XAUI1_TX0N
E7 XAUI1_TX1P
E8 XAUI1_TX2N
E9 XAUI1_TX3P
E10 STX28N
E11 STX27P
E12 STX26N
E13 STX25P
E14 SGMIITXN
E15 Uplink_Hotswap_LED
E16 Uplink_Spare_Intr
E17 Uplink_Status_LED1
E18 Uplink_P27_LED0
E19 POWER (12V)
E20 POWER (12V)
F1 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
F2 XAUI0_TX0P
F3 GND
F4 XAUI0_TX2P
F5 GND
F6 XAUI1_TX0P
F7 GND
F8 XAUI_TX2P
F9 GND
F10 STX28P
F11 GND
F12 STX26P
F13 GND
F14 SGMIITXP
F15 GND
F16 Uplink_Expander_Intr
F17 GND
F18 Uplink_P27_LED1
F19 GND
F20 POWER (12V)
G1 GND
G2 GND
G3 XAUI0_RX1N
G4 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
G5 XAUI0_RX3N
G6 GND
G7 XAUI1_RX1N
G8 GND
G9 XAUI1_RX3N
G10 GND
G11 SRX27N
G12 GND
G13 SRX25N
G14 GND
G15 GND
G16 GND
G17 Uplink_P25_LED0
G18 GND
G19 POWER (12V)
G20 GND
H1 Uplink_PD_Loopback
H2 GND
H3 XAUI0_RX1P
H4 GND
H5 XAUI0_RX3P
H6 Uplink_P26_ LED2
H7 XAUI1_RX1P

Pin Number Pin Name
H8 Uplink_P28_ LED2
H9 XAUI1_RX3P
H10 GND
H11 SRX27P
H12 Uplink_XAUI_MDC
H13 SRX25P
H14 GND
H15 Serial_RX
H16 GND
H17 Uplink_P25_LED1
H18 Uplink_P28_LED0
H19 POWER (12V)
H20 POWER (12V)
I1 GND
I2 GND
I3 GND
I4 GND
I5 GND
I6 GND
I7 GND
I8 GND
I9 GND
I10 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
I11 GND
I12 GND
I13 GND
I14 GND
I15 GND
I16 Serial_TX
I17 GND
I18 Uplink_P28_LED1
I19 GND
I20 POWER (12V)
Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches
EX4200 switches use a 68-pin connector cable to interconnect switches to form a Virtual
Chassis. The cable is provided with the switch. Table 24 on page 81 provides the Virtual
Chassis ports (VCPs) connector pinout information.
Table 24: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information

Pin Number Pin Name
A1 GND
A2 P1TXP0
A3 P1TXN0
A4 GND

Table 24: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information (continued)
Pin Number Pin Name
A5 P1TXP1
A6 P1TXN1
A7 GND
A8 P1TXP2
A9 P1TXN2
A10 GND
A11 P1TXP3
A12 P1TXN3
A13 GND
A14 NC
A15 NC
A16 GND
A17 NC
A18 NC
A19 NC
A20 NC
A21 NC
A22 GND
A23 P2TXP0
A24 P2TXN0
A25 GND
A26 P2TXP1
A27 P2TXN1
A28 GND

Pin Number Pin Name
A29 P2TXP2
A30 P2TXN2
A31 GND
A32 P2TXP3
A33 P2TXN3
A34 GND
B1 GND
B2 P1RXP0
B3 P1RXN0
B4 GND
B5 P1RXP1
B6 P1RXN1
B7 GND
B8 P1RXP2
B9 P1RXN2
B10 GND
B11 P1RXP3
B12 P1RXN3
B13 GND
B14 NC
B15 NC
B16 NC
B17 NC
B18 NC

Pin Number Pin Name
B19 NC
B20 NC
B21 NC
B22 GND
B23 P2RXP0
B24 P2RXN0
B25 GND
B26 P2RXP1
B27 P2RXN1
B28 GND
B29 P2RXP2
B30 P2RXN2
B31 GND
B32 P2RXP3
B33 P2RXN3
B34 GND
Related Topics • Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 107
• Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 106
• Understanding Virtual Chassis Components

page 105
• Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 139

PART 2
Planning for Switch Installation

• Site Preparation on page 87
• Mounting and Clearance Requirements on page 93
• Cable Specifications on page 99
• Planning Power Requirements on page 101


CHAPTER 4
Site Preparation
• Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87

• General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 89
• Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 89
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 90
Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The checklist in Table 25 on page 87 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when
preparing a site for EX3200 or EX4200 switch installation.
Table 25: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date
Environment
Verify that environmental factors such as “Environmental Requirements and
temperature and humidity do not exceed switch Specifications for EX Series Switches”
tolerances. on page 90
Power
Measure distance between external power
sources and switch installation site.
Locate sites for connection of system

grounding.
Calculate the power consumption and “Power Specifications for EX3200

requirements. and EX4200 Switches” on page 101
Hardware Configuration
Choose the number and types of switches you “EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
want to install. Hardware Overview” on page 3
Rack or Cabinet

Table 25: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date
Verify that your rack or cabinet meets the “Rack Requirements for EX3200 and
minimum requirements for the installation of EX4200 Switches” on page 93
the switch.
“Cabinet Requirements for EX3200
and EX4200 Switches” on page 94
Plan rack or cabinet location, including required “Clearance Requirements for Airflow
space clearances. and Hardware Maintenance for
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on
page 96
Secure the rack or cabinet to the floor and

building structure.
Wall
Verify that the wall meets the minimum “Requirements for Mounting an
requirements for the installation of the switch. EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a
Desktop or Wall” on page 95
Verify that there is appropriate clearance in your “Clearance Requirements for Airflow
selected location. and Hardware Maintenance for
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on
page 96
Cables
Acquire cables and connectors:
• Determine the number of cables needed

based on your planned configuration.
• Review the maximum distance allowed for
each cable. Choose the length of cable based
on the distance between the hardware
components being connected.
Plan the cable routing and management.
Related Topics • General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207

Chapter 4: Site Preparation
General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches
Efficient switch operation requires proper site planning and maintenance and proper
layout of the equipment, rack or cabinet (if used), and wiring closet.
To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your EX Series switch and
prevent environmentally caused equipment failures:
• Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as
metal flakes.
• Follow prescribed airflow guidelines to ensure that the cooling system functions properly
and that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
switch.
• Follow the prescribed ESD prevention procedures to avoid damaging the equipment.
Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time.
• Install the switch in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the
switch.
Related Topics • Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches on page 96
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8208 Switch
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 90
Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches
Table 26 on page 90 describes the factors you must consider while planning the electrical
wiring at your site.
WARNING: It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded

environment and to use electrical surge-suppression devices.

Table 26: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

Site Wiring Factor Guidelines
Signaling limitations If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult
experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding:
• Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference

(RFI).
• Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed
recommended distances or pass between buildings.
• Electromagnetic pulses (EMPs) caused by lightning
damages unshielded conductors and electronic devices.
Radio frequency interference To reduce or eliminate radio frequency interference (RFI) from
your site wiring, do the following:
• Use twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding

conductors.
• If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a
high-quality twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor
for each data signal when applicable.
Electromagnetic compatibility If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC), particularly from lightning or radio
transmitters, seek expert advice.
Some of the problems caused by strong sources of

electromagnetic interference (EMI) are:
• Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the switch

• Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted
over the lines into the equipment
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 235
• Power Supply in EX2200 Switches
• AC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches
• AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches
The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated,
and temperature-controlled environment.

Chapter 4: Site Preparation
Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed:
• The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and
filters, reducing the efficiency of the switch cooling system.
• Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or
restricted, or if the intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the
switch temperature monitor shutting down the switch to protect the hardware
components.
Table 27 on page 91 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch
operation.
Table 27: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances

Description Tolerance
Altitude No performance degradation to 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
Relative humidity Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 10% through
85%, noncondensing
Temperature • EX2200, EX3200, EX4200, and EX4500 switches: Normal

operation ensured in temperature range of 32° F through 113° F
(0° C through 45° C)
• EX8208 and EX8216 switches: Normal operation ensured in
temperature range of 32° F through 104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Seismic Complies with Zone 4 earthquake requirements as per GR-63, Issue

3.
NOTE: Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment
rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110–16, 110–17, and 110–18
of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Related Topics • Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches


CHAPTER 5
Mounting and Clearance Requirements
• Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 93

• Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or
Wall on page 95
Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
You can mount the switch on two-post racks or four-post racks.
Rack requirements consist of:
• Rack type
• Mounting bracket hole spacing
• Rack size and strength
• Rack connection to the building structure
Table 28 on page 93 provides the rack requirements and specifications for the switch.
Table 28: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch

Rack Requirement Guidelines
Rack type Use a two-post rack or a four-post rack. You can mount the switch on any two-post or four-post
rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1 U (1.75 in./4.45 cm) increments and
that meets the size and strength requirements to support the weight.
A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document
number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association (http://www.eia.org).
The rack must meet the strength requirements to support the weight of the chassis.
Mounting bracket hole The holes in the mounting brackets are spaced at 1 U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm), so that the switch can
spacing be mounted in any rack that provides holes spaced at that distance.

Table 28: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch (continued)
Rack Requirement Guidelines
Rack size and strength • Ensure that the rack complies with one of these standards:
• A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document
number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association (http://www.eia.org).
• Ensure that the rack rails are spaced widely enough to accommodate the switch chassis' external
dimensions . The outer edges of the front-mounting brackets extend the width of the chassis to
19 in. (48.2 cm).
• The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the switch.
• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows for the proper clearance around the
switch and rack.
Rack connection to • Secure the rack to the building structure.

building structure • If earthquakes are a possibility in your geographical area, secure the rack to the floor.
• Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum stability.
One pair of mounting brackets for mounting the switch on two posts of a rack is supplied
with each switch. For mounting the switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, you can
order a four-post rack-mount kit separately.
Related Topics • Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 7
• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 122
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet

on page 128
Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
You can mount the switch in a cabinet that contains a 19-in. rack.
Cabinet requirements consist of:
• Cabinet size
• Clearance requirements
• Cabinet airflow requirements
Table 29 on page 95 provides the cabinet requirements and specifications for the switch.

Chapter 5: Mounting and Clearance Requirements
Table 29: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch

Cabinet Requirement Guidelines
Cabinet size • You can mount the switch in a cabinet that contains a 19-in.
rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated
Equipment (document number EIA-310–D) published by
the Electronics Industry Association (http://www.eia.org).
NOTE: The rack must meet the strength requirements to

support the weight of the switch.
• The minimum cabinet size must be able to accommodate

the maximum external dimensions of the switch.
Cabinet clearance • The outer edges of the mounting brackets extend the width
of the chassis to 19 in. (48.3 cm).
• The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 30 in.
(76.2 cm) between the inside of the front door and the inside
of the rear door.
Cabinet airflow requirements When you mount the switch in a cabinet, ensure that
ventilation through the cabinet is sufficient to prevent
overheating.
• Ensure adequate cool air supply to dissipate the thermal

output of the switch or switches.
• Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust air
to exit the cabinet without recirculating into the switch. An
open cabinet (without a top or doors) that employs hot air
exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow
through the chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors,
perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot
air exhaust.
• Install the switch in the cabinet in a way that maximizes the
open space on the side of the chassis that has the hot air
exhaust. This maximizes the clearance for critical airflow.
• Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of
airflow to and from the chassis.
• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent cabinets allows
for the proper clearance around the switch and cabinet.
• A cabinet larger than the minimum required provides better
airflow and reduces the chance of overheating.
Related Topics • Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
• Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 93
Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wall
You can install the switch on a desktop or wall. When choosing a location, allow at least
6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance between the front and back of the chassis and adjacent
equipment or walls.

Ensure that the wall onto which the switch is installed is stable and securely supported.
If you are mounting the switch in sheetrock (wall board with a gypsum plaster core) or
in wall board not backed by wall studs, use hollow wall anchors capable of supporting
the combined weight of two fully loaded chassis. Insert the screws into wall studs
wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis.
Use the wall-mount kit from Juniper Networks to mount the switch on a wall. The
wall-mount kit is not part of the standard package and needs to be ordered separately.
Related Topics • Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
• Wall-Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 225
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 121
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 128
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches
When planning the site for installing an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, you must allow
sufficient clearance around the installed switch (see Figure 27 on page 96).
Figure 27: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance

for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
• Allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance on the side between devices that have fans
or blowers installed. Allow 2.8 in. (7 cm) between the side of the chassis and any
non-heat-producing surface such as a wall. For the cooling system to function properly,
the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted. Figure 28 on page 97 shows the
airflow through the EX3200 switch chassis and Figure 29 on page 98 shows the airflow
through the EX4200 switch chassis.
• If you are mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a rack or cabinet with other
equipment, or if you are placing it on the desktop or floor near other equipment, ensure

Chapter 5: Mounting and Clearance Requirements
that the exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
chassis.
• Leave at least 24 in. (61 cm) both in front of and behind the EX3200 or EX4200 switch.
For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, you must leave
adequate space at the front and back of the switch. NEBS GR-63 recommends that
you allow at least 30 in. (76.2 cm) in front of the rack or cabinet and 24 in. (61 cm)
behind the rack or cabinet.


CHAPTER 6
Cable Specifications
• Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 99
Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
EX3200 and EX4200 switches have interfaces that use various types of network cables.
For instructions on connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch to a network for out-of-band

management using an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector, see “Connecting an EX
Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management” on page 152.
For instructions on connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch to a management console

using an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector, see “Connecting an EX Series Switch
to a Management Console” on page 153.
Related Topics • Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on
page 42


CHAPTER 7
Planning Power Requirements
• Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 101

• AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 102
Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
This topic describes power specifications for power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200
switches.
Table 30 on page 101 provides the AC power supply electrical specifications for EX3200
and EX4200 switches.
Table 31 on page 101 provides the DC power supply electrical specifications for EX3200
and EX4200 switches.
Table 30: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Item Specification
AC input voltage 100 through 240 VAC
AC input line frequency 50 through 60 Hz
AC system current rating • 4 A (for switches with 8 ports equipped for Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the
switch with 24 100Base-FX/1000Base-SX SFP ports)
• 7 A (for switches with 24 ports equipped for PoE)
• 12 A (for switches with 48 ports equipped for PoE)
Table 31: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Item Specification
DC input voltage 36 through 72 VDC
DC input current 7 A maximum
Power supply output 190 W
Output holdup time 1 ms minimum

NOTE: The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches does not support Power
over Ethernet (PoE); you can use either an external power injector or an AC power supply
to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch.
NOTE: For DC power supplies, we recommend that you provide at least 7.5 A @ 48 VDC
and use a facility circuit breaker rated for 10 A minimum. Doing so enables you to operate
the switch in any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure, and allows
the switch to function at full capacity using multiple power supplies.
Related Topics • AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 102
• General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207
AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Detachable AC power cords are supplied with the switch. The coupler is type C13 as
described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug
at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for
your geographical location.
CAUTION: The AC power cord for the switches is intended for use with that switch only
and not for any other use.
NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters (approximately
14.75 feet) in length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8
(NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52 and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3).
The cords supplied with the switch are in compliance.
Table 32 on page 102 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or
region.
Table 32: AC Power Cord Specifications

Country/Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards
Australia 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz AS/NZ 3112
China 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz GB2099 and GB1002
Europe (except Italy, Switzerland, and 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEE (7) VII
United Kingdom)

Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
Table 32: AC Power Cord Specifications (continued)

Country/Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards
Italy 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEI 23-16
Japan 125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz or 60 Hz JIS C8303
North America 125 VAC, 13 A, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15
Switzerland 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SEV 1011 SEV 6534/2
United Kingdom 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz BS 1363/A
Figure 30 on page 103 illustrates the plug on the power cord for each country or region
listed in Table 32 on page 102.
Figure 30: AC Plug Types


CHAPTER 8
Planning the Virtual Chassis
• Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 105

• Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 107
• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI
Procedure) on page 109
Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch
Virtual Chassis is a feature in Juniper Networks EX4200 Ethernet Switches that allows
you to interconnect two or more EX4200 switches, enabling them to operate as a unified
single high bandwidth switch. You can interconnect a maximum of 10 EX4200 switches
through the dedicated 64-Gbps Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) or the uplink module ports
configured as VCPs to form a Virtual Chassis. All EX4200 switch models support Virtual
Chassis, and you can interconnect different models, offering a range of port configurations,
within the same Virtual Chassis.
The Virtual Chassis configuration includes designation of a master switch and a backup
switch, with all other switches in the configuration designated as "line card" role switches.
Virtual Chassis operation is managed through the master switch. Each switch in the
Virtual Chassis is assigned a unique identifier that is displayed on the switch LCD.
Related Topics • Understanding Virtual Chassis Components

Planning the Virtual Chassis
Before installing EX4200 switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration, you must consider
the following factors:
• The number of switches in the Virtual Chassis and location—You can interconnect two
to ten EX4200 switches to form a Virtual Chassis. You can stack the switches in a
single rack or install them on multiple racks. For information on the size and strength
of racks, see “Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 93. See
“Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 7 for
the dimensions and weights of the switch models.
• Cabling requirements for Virtual Chassis—You can interconnect the EX4200 switches
in a Virtual Chassis configuration through Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) using the
0.5 meter long VCP cable supplied in the package. Depending on the Virtual Chassis
configurations you have, you might need cables of different lengths. If you need longer
cables, you can purchase them separately. The maximum length allowed for a Virtual
Chassis cable is 5 meters. To connect switches that are installed farther apart, you
must configure the uplink module ports as Virtual Chassis ports and use them to
interconnect the switches.
NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, you should reuse the locking
covers provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers
also separately.
• Clearance on the rear of the switch—You must have access to the rear of the switch
if you plan to interconnect switches to form a Virtual Chassis.
• Power supply—You must plan the installation site to meet the power requirements of
the EX Series switches in a Virtual Chassis. The input power requirements vary
depending on the number of Power over Ethernet (PoE) ports in a switch. See “Power
Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 27 for the power requirements for
the various configurations of PoE ports in EX4200 switches.
Related Topics • Understanding Virtual Chassis Components

page 105

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis
Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches
You can install EX4200 switches in a single rack or multiple racks, or in different wiring
closets, and interconnect them to form a Virtual Chassis. There are two dedicated Virtual
Chassis ports (VCPs) on the rear panel of the EX4200 switch that are used exclusively
to interconnect EX4200 switches as a Virtual Chassis. The physical location of the
switches in a Virtual Chassis is restricted only by the maximum length supported for
cables to connect the VCPs. The maximum cable length for interconnecting the dedicated
VCPs is 5 meters. If you want to interconnect EX4200 switches that are located beyond
the reach of the dedicated VCP cables, you can install the XFP uplink module, the SFP
uplink module, or the SFP+ uplink module and set the uplink module ports as VCP
interfaces. See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).
NOTE: The interfaces for the two dedicated VCPs are operational by default. However,
if you are using the uplink module ports as VCPs, you must explicitly set the uplink
module ports to function as VCPs.
The following illustrations describe various Virtual Chassis cabling configuration examples.
NOTE: For increased availability and redundancy, we recommend that you always
configure your Virtual Chassis in a ring topology.
Figure 31 on page 107 and Figure 32 on page 108 show five EX4200 switches stacked
vertically in a rack and interconnected in a ring topology using four short Virtual Chassis
cables and one long Virtual Chassis cable.
Figure 31: EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in

a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 1

Figure 32: EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected

in a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 2
Figure 33 on page 108 shows five EX4200 switches stacked vertically in a rack and
interconnected in a ring topology using short-length and medium-length Virtual Chassis
cables.
Figure 33: EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected

in a Ring Topology Using Short and Medium Cables
Figure 34 on page 108 and Figure 35 on page 109 show five EX4200 switches mounted on
the top rows of adjacent racks and interconnected in a ring topology using medium-length
and long-length Virtual Chassis cables.
Figure 34: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected

in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 1

Figure 35: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected

in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 2
Related Topics • Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on

page 105
• Example: Configuring a Virtual Chassis Interconnected Across Multiple Wiring Closets
Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI Procedure)
You can add one or more EX4200 switches to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration.
Up to ten EX4200 switches can be included within a Virtual Chassis configuration. You
can add the new switches to either type—nonprovisioned or preprovisioned—of Virtual
Chassis configuration. See Configuring a Virtual Chassis (CLI Procedure) for descriptions
of these types.
To add a switch to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration, use the procedure that
matches what you need to accomplish:
• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within the Same
Wiring Closet on page 109
• Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis
Configuration on page 110
• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using
Autoprovisioning on page 112
Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within the Same Wiring Closet
Before you begin, be sure you have:
• Mounted the new switch in a rack.
• Confirmed that the new switch is powered off.
• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, made a note of the serial number
(on the back of the switch). You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to
include the serial number of the new member switch.
• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, edited the existing Virtual Chassis
configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch. You can specify
the role of the new member switch when you add its serial number in the Virtual Chassis
configuration file. The parameters specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration

file are applied after the new member switch has been interconnected to an existing
member switch.
NOTE: After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration, you can
use the autoprovisioning feature to add member switches to that configuration.
To add a new member switch to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration within the same
wiring closet:
1. If the new member switch has been previously configured, revert that switch’s
configuration to the factory defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory
Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
2. Interconnect the unpowered new switch to at least one member of the existing
Virtual Chassis configuration using the dedicated Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs).
3. Power on the new switch.
4. Confirm that the new member switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis
configuration by checking the front-panel display for the member ID. It should display
a member ID that is higher than 0 (1 through 9), because there is already at least
one member of the Virtual Chassis configuration.
NOTE: If you are using a preprovisioned configuration, the member ID is automatically

assigned to the member’s serial number in the configuration file.
Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration
To add a new switch from a different wiring closet to an existing Virtual Chassis
configuration, you must use a long cable to connect the new member switch across
wiring closets. You can use a port on an SFP, SFP+ or XFP uplink module, or an SFP
network port on an EX4200-24F switch, and a fiber-optic cable for this purpose.
• Installed the uplink modules needed for the Virtual Chassis configuration.
• If the new member switch has been previously configured, reverted its configuration
to the factory defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX
Series Switch.
• Powered on the new member switch as a standalone switch and configured its uplink
module ports as VCPs. Otherwise, it cannot be recognized as a member switch by the
master.
• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, made a note of the serial number
(on the back of the switch). You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to
include the serial number of the new member switch.

• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, edited the existing Virtual Chassis
configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch. You can specify
the role of the new member switch when you add its serial number in the Virtual Chassis
configuration file. The parameters specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration
file are applied after the new member switch has been interconnected with its uplink
VCP to an existing member switch.
• Confirmed that the new, currently standalone switch is powered off.
• Prepared an existing member switch for interconnecting with the new switch through
an uplink module port by configuring an uplink module port as a VCP on the existing
member switch.
NOTE: After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration, you can
use the autoprovisioning feature to add member switches to that configuration.
To add a new member switch that is going to be interconnected with the existing Virtual
Chassis configuration across wiring closets:
1. Power on the new switch.
2. Connect a laptop or terminal to the console port of the switch, or use EZSetup on
the standalone switch to specify temporary identification parameters. (When you
interconnect the new member switch with the existing Virtual Chassis configuration,
the master will overwrite and disable any specified parameters that conflict with
the Virtual Chassis parameters or assigned member configuration.)
3. Use the CLI or the J-Web interface to set the uplink module ports as VCPs.
NOTE: If you are using a nonprovisioned configuration, you might configure the new
member switch with a mastership priority value that is less than that of the existing
member switches. Doing so ensures that the new member switch will function in a
linecard role when it is included within the Virtual Chassis configuration.
4. Power off the new switch.
5. Interconnect the new member switch to at least one member of the existing Virtual
Chassis configuration using the uplink module ports on each of the switches that
have been configured as VCPs.
6. Power on the new member switch.
7. Confirm that the new member switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis
a member ID that is higher than 0 (1 through 9), because there is already at least
one member of the Virtual Chassis configuration.
NOTE: If you are using a preprovisioned configuration, the member ID is automatically

assigned to the member's serial number in the configuration file.

Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using

Autoprovisioning
• Installed the uplink modules needed for the Virtual Chassis configuration.
• Ensured that the preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration has an active master.
For more information, see Example: Configuring a Virtual Chassis Using a Preprovisioned
Configuration File.
• On the master, configured the Link Level Discovery Protocol (LLDP) on the uplink
module ports that will be used as VCPs. LLDP is configured by default but might have
been disabled. To configure LLDP, see Configuring LLDP (CLI Procedure) or Configuring
LLDP (J-Web Procedure).
• Ensured that the new member switch has the factory-default configuration. If the new
member switch has been previously configured, revert its configuration to the factory
defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
• Made a note of the serial number (on the back of the switch). You will need to edit the
Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch.
• Edited the existing Virtual Chassis preprovisioned configuration to include the serial
number of the new member switch. You can specify the role of the new member switch
when you add its serial number to the Virtual Chassis configuration file. The parameters
specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration file are applied to the new member
switch after it has been interconnected through its uplink VCP to an existing member
switch.
• Prepared an existing member switch to interconnect with the new switch through an
uplink module port by configuring an uplink module port as a VCP on the existing
member switch.
• Ensured that the operational modes of the uplink modules on the existing member
switch and the new member switch match.
• Confirmed that the new member switch is powered off.
• Interconnected the existing switch with the new switch using the appropriate cable.
If these conditions are not met, autoprovisioning will not work and you will need to
manually configure uplink module ports on the switch to be added to the configuration
to be VCPs. For more information, see Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis
Port (CLI Procedure).
To add a switch to an existing preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration using the

autoprovisioning feature:
1. Power on the new member switch.
2. Confirm that the new member switch is now included in the Virtual Chassis

a member ID in the range from 0 through 9 because there was already at least one
member of the Virtual Chassis configuration. The member ID is automatically assigned
to the new member switch's serial number in the configuration file.
Related Topics • Example: Expanding a Virtual Chassis Configuration in a Single Wiring Closet
• Example: Setting Up a Multimember Virtual Chassis Access Switch with a Default

Configuration
• Example: Configuring a Virtual Chassis Interconnected Across Multiple Wiring Closets
• Example: Configuring a Virtual Chassis Using a Preprovisioned Configuration File
• Example: Configuring Automatic Software Update on Virtual Chassis Member Switches
• Monitoring Virtual Chassis Configuration Status and Statistics
• Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI Procedure) on

page 183
• Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch


PART 3
Installing and Connecting the Switch and

Switch Components
• Installing the Switch on page 117
• Installing Switch Components on page 131
• Connecting the Switch on page 141
• Performing Initial Configuration on page 161


CHAPTER 9
Installing the Switch

• Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 118
• Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or
Cabinet on page 128
Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
hardware components.
To install and connect an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
1. Follow instructions in “Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 118.
2. Mount the switch by following instructions appropriate for your site:
• “Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on

page 122 (using the mounting brackets provided)
• “Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on

page 124 (using the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit)
• “Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or

Cabinet” on page 128 (using the 2-in.-recess front brackets from the separately
orderable four-post rack-mount kit)
• “Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface” on

page 121 (using the rubber feet provided)
• “Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall” on page 128 (using the

separately orderable wall-mount kit)

3. Follow instructions in “Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 141.
4. Follow instructions for connecting power as appropriate for your site:
5. Perform initial configuration of the switch by following instructions in “Connecting

and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 165 or “Connecting
and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)” on page 167.
6. Set the switch’s management options by following the appropriate instructions:
• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on

page 152
Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
hardware components. EX3200 and EX4200 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton,
secured with foam packing material. The carton also contains an accessory box and
quick start instructions.
CAUTION: EX3200 and EX4200 switches are maximally protected inside the shipping
carton. Do not unpack the switches until you are ready to begin installation.
To unpack an EX3200 or EX4200 switch (see Figure 36 on page 119):
1. Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible,
but where you have enough room to remove the system components.
2. Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.
3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.
4. Remove the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on
the label attached to the carton.
5. Pull out the packing material holding the switch in place.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch
6. Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the
switch. An inventory of parts provided with an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is provided
in Table 33 on page 119.
7. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship
the switch later.
Figure 36: Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Table 33: Inventory of Components Provided with an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch

Component Quantity
Switch 1
Fan tray (preinstalled) 1
Power supply (preinstalled if your system order includes a 320 W AC power supply; not preinstalled if 1
your system order includes a 600 W AC power supply, a 930 W AC power supply, or a 190 W DC power
supply)
Power cord retainer 1
Mounting brackets 2
Mounting screws 8
Rubber feet 4

Table 33: Inventory of Components Provided with an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch (continued)
Component Quantity
RJ-45 cable and RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter 1
Virtual Chassis cable (for an EX4200 switch) 1
Virtual Chassis cable connector retainers (for an EX4200 switch) 2
Dust covers for ports (for an EX4200-24F switch) 24
Related Topics • Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 120
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
• On two posts in a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the mounting brackets provided with
the switch.
• On four posts in a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the separately orderable four-post
rack-mount kit.
• In a position recessed 2 in. from the front of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the
2-in.-recess front brackets in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. You
can mount the switch in this recessed position on two-post or four-post racks and
cabinets.
• On a desk or other level surface by using rubber feet. The switch is shipped with four
rubber feet to be used to stabilize the chassis on a desk or other level surface.
• On a wall by using the separately orderable wall-mount kit.
The holes in the mounting brackets are placed at 1 U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm.) apart so that
the switch can be mounted in any rack or cabinet that provides holes spaced at that
distance.
Related Topics • Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 122

on page 128

Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface by using
the 4 rubber feet that are shipped with the switch. The rubber feet stabilize the chassis.
Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface:
• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist
for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 87.
• Place the desk in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and
maintenance, and secure it to the building structure.
• Read “General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches” on page 207,
with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200
Switches” on page 220.
• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see “Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch” on page 118).
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• 4 rubber feet to stabilize the chassis on the a desk or other level surface (provided in
the accessory box shipped with the switch)
• Dust covers for ports (for EX4200-24F switches only; optional)
To mount the switch on a desk or other level surface:
1. Turn the chassis upside down on the desk or the level surface where you intend to
mount the switch.
2. Attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the chassis, as shown in Figure 37 on page 121.
3. Turn the chassis right side up on the desk or the level surface.
4. If it is an EX4200-24F switch, we recommend you insert dust covers in unused SFP

ports.
Figure 37: Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chassis

Related Topics • Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 147
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on two posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by
using the mounting brackets provided with the switch. (The remainder of this topic uses
“rack” to mean “rack or cabinet.”)
You can mount the switch on four posts of a four-post rack by using the mounting brackets
provided with the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. See “Mounting an
EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 124.
NOTE: If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position on either a two-post rack
or a four-post rack, you can use the 2-in.-recess front brackets provided in the separately
orderable four-post rack-mount kit.
Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on two posts in a rack:
• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
• 2 mounting brackets and 8 mounting screws (provided in the accessory box shipped
with the switch)
• Screws to secure the chassis to the rack (not provided)
• 2-in.-recess front brackets if you will mount the switch in a recessed position (brackets
are from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit).

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another secures the switch
to the rack.
CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple switches on a rack, mount a switch in the bottom
of the rack first and proceed to mount the rest of the switches from bottom to top.
To mount the switch on two posts in a rack:
1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.
2. Align the mounting brackets along the front, rear, or center of the side panels of the
switch chassis depending on how you want to mount the switch. For example, if you
want to center-mount the switch, align the brackets along the centers of the side
panel. See Figure 38 on page 123.
Figure 38: Attaching the Mounting Bracket Along the Front of the Switch
NOTE: If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position, use the 2-in.-recess front
mount brackets from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit.
3. Align the bottom holes in the mounting brackets with holes on the side panels of the
switch chassis.
4. Insert mounting screws into the aligned holes. Tighten the screws.
5. Ensure that the other holes in the mounting brackets are aligned with the holes in
the side panels. Insert a screw in each hole and tighten the screws.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the
rack, aligning the mounting bracket holes with the threaded holes in the rack or
cabinet rail. Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each
rack rail, making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 39 on page 124.

Figure 39: Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack
Mounting rack
Mounting bracket
g020094
7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws.
Tighten the screws.
8. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all screws on one side of the
rack are aligned with the screws on the other side.
9. If the switch is an EX4200-24F model, we recommend that you insert dust covers
in any unused SFP ports.
Related Topics • Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141

on page 128
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on four posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by
using the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. (The remainder of this topic
uses “rack” to mean “rack or cabinet.”)
You can mount the switch on two posts in either a two-post rack or a four-post rack by
using the mounting brackets provided with the switch. See “Mounting an EX3200 or
EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 122.

NOTE: If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position on either a two-post rack
or a four-post rack, you can use the 2-in.-recess front brackets provided in the separately
orderable four-post rack-mount kit.
NOTE: If you are mounting an EX4200 switch on four posts, ensure that the rack is
27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep if you will mount the switch flush with the rack front and
that the rack is 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep if you will mount the switch 2 in. recessed
from the rack front, thus ensuring that the protective earthing terminal is accessible
through the opening in the rear bracket.
Before mounting the switch on four posts in a rack:
• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and
• 6 flat-head 4-40 mounting screws (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)
• 12 flat-head 4x6-mm Phillips mounting screws (provided with the four-post rack-mount
kit)
• One pair each of flush or 2-in.-recess front brackets
• One pair of side-rail brackets
• One pair of rear brackets
• Screws to secure the chassis and the rear brackets to the rack (not provided)
CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack and mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the top in
decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount the switch on four posts in a rack:
1. Attach the front brackets (either the flush or the 2-in.-recess brackets) to the side-rail
brackets using six 4-40 flat-head Phillips mounting screws. See Figure 40 on page 126.
Figure 40: Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side-Rail Bracket
2. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.
3. Align the side-rail brackets along the side panels of the switch chassis. Align the two
holes in the rear of the side-rail brackets with the two holes on the rear of the side
panel.
4. Insert 4x6-mm Phillips flat-head mounting screws into the two aligned holes and
tighten the screws. Ensure that the remaining four holes in the side-rail brackets are
aligned with the four holes in the side panel. See Figure 41 on page 126.
Figure 41: Attaching the Side-Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis
5. Insert the 4x6-mm Phillips flat-head mounting screws into the remaining four holes
in the side-rail brackets and tighten the screws.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the
rack, aligning the side-rail bracket holes with the threaded holes in the front post of
the rack. Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each
rack rail, making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 42 on page 127.

Figure 42: Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack
Switch
g004477
Side-rail Front
bracket bracket
7. Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the
appropriate screws for your rack.
8. Slide the rear brackets into the side-rail brackets. See Figure 43 on page 127.
Figure 43: Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four-Post Rack
Rear brackets
Switch
Side-rail
g004478
bracket
9. Attach the rear brackets to the rear post by using the appropriate screws for your
rack. Tighten the screws.
10. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all the screws on the front of
the rack are aligned with the screws at the back of the rack.
11. If the switch is an EX4200-24F model, we recommend that you insert dust covers
in any unused SFP ports.


on page 128
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch in a rack or cabinet such that the switch
is recessed inside the rack from the rack front by 2 inches. You can use the 2-in.-recess
front brackets provided in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit to mount
the switch in a recessed position.
Reasons that you might want to mount the switch in a recessed position include:
• You are mounting the switch in a cabinet and the cabinet doors will not close completely
unless the switch is recessed.
• The switch you are mounting has an uplink module with transceivers installed in it—the
transceivers in the uplink module ports protrude from the front of the switch.
To mount the switch in a recessed position on four posts, follow the instructions in
“Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 124.
To mount the switch in a recessed position on two posts, follow the instructions in
“Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 122.
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall
You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a wall by using the separately orderable
wall-mount kit.
Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a wall:

• 2 wall-mount brackets (provided with the wall-mount kit)
• 12 wall-mount bracket screws (provided with the wall-mount kit)
• 4 mounting screws (8-32 x 1.25 in. or M4 x 30 mm) (not included)
• Hollow wall anchors capable of supporting the combined weight of two fully loaded
switches, up to 44 lb (20 kg) (not included)—if you are mounting the switch in sheetrock
(wall board with a gypsum plaster core) or in wall board not backed by wall studs
WARNING: When mounted in a vertical position, an EX3200 or EX4200 switch must

be oriented with the front panel of the chassis pointing down in order to ensure proper
airflow and meet safety requirements in the event of a fire.
NOTE: For easier lifting, install any additional power supplies only after you mount the
switch on the wall.
To mount the switch on a wall:
1. Attach the wall-mount brackets to the sides of the chassis using four of the
wall-mount bracket screws on each side, as shown in Figure 44 on page 129.
Figure 44: Attaching Wall-Mount Brackets to an EX3200 or EX4200

Switch Chassis
Rear panel
g020200
Front panel
2. If you are mounting two switches together, line the second switch on top of the first
and attach it to the mounting brackets using two wall-mount bracket screws on
each side (see Figure 45 on page 130).

3. Insert the mounting screws in the wall. Insert the top pair of mounting screws
474.35 mm apart, and insert the second pair of mounting screws 151.81 mm directly
below the first set.
If the mounting screws are inserted in wall board with no stud behind it, you must
use dry wall anchors rated to support 75 lb (34 kg). Insert the screws into wall studs
wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis.
Screw the screws only part way in, leaving about 1/4 in. (6 mm) distance between
the head of the screw and the wall.
4. Grasp each side of the switch or switches, lift the switch or switches, and hang the
brackets from the mounting screws as shown in Figure 45 on page 130.
Figure 45: Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall
Rear panel
Hang attached brackets

on wall-mounted screws.
g020201
Front
panel
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
6. If it is an EX4200-24F switch, we recommend you insert dust covers in unused SFP

ports.
Related Topics • Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 147

CHAPTER 10
Installing Switch Components
• Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware

Components on page 131
• Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132
• Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 139
Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components
hardware components. The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX3200 and EX4200
switches are:
• Power supply
• Fan tray
• Uplink module
• SFP transceiver
• XFP transceiver
To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing

a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 132. To remove a power supply
from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Power Supply
from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 174.
To install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a

Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 133. To remove a fan tray from an
EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200
or EX4200 Switch” on page 176.

To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in

“Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 135. To remove an
uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an
Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 177.
To install an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow

instructions in “Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch” on page 137. To remove
an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions
in “Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 179.
Related Topics • Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31
Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
The power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.
• A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch (see Figure 46 on page 133):
1. Taking care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the power supply from its bag.
2. Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the
screwdriver.
3. Push down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position.
4. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel
of the switch and slide it in until it is fully seated.
NOTE: The handle on the 320 W AC power supply is at the bottom of the power supply
faceplate, while the handle on the 600 W and the 930 W AC power supplies is at the
top of the faceplate. The handle on the 190 W DC power supply runs across the faceplate.
5. Push the locking lever up to its highest position (this action might pull the power
supply in).
6. Tighten the locking lever screw by using the screwdriver.

Chapter 10: Installing Switch Components
Figure 46: Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source outlet.
Related Topics • Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174

page 131
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
EX3200 and EX4200 switches have a single fan tray on the rear panel. The fan tray is a
hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and
replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

• A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis (see Figure 47 on page 134
and Figure 48 on page 134):
CAUTION: If you are installing a fan tray in an EX3200 switch, ensure the fan faces
upwards. If you are installing a fan tray in an EX4200 switch, ensure the fans face
downwards.
1. Remove the fan tray from its bag. Using both hands, align the tray with the fan tray
guides on the fan tray slot on the rear panel of the chassis and slide it in until it is
fully seated.
2. Tighten the screw or screws on the fan tray by using the screwdriver.
Figure 47: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 Switch
Figure 48: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch
Related Topics • Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 176

page 131

Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
If your EX3200 or EX4200 switch includes an optional uplink module, you install it in the
switch's front panel. The different types of uplink modules are described in “Uplink
Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 34.
The uplink module in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting
switch functions.
NOTE: If you have set an uplink module port as a Virtual Chassis port (VCP), removing
the uplink module breaks the setting. You must reset the port as a VCP after you replace
the module. See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).
NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in an SFP uplink module or in

an SFP+ uplink module when the SFP+ uplink module is operating in the 1-gigabit mode,
a corresponding network port from the last four built-in ports is disabled. For example,
if you install an SFP or SFP+ transceiver in port 2 on the uplink module (ge-0/1/3), then
ge-0/0/23 is disabled. The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface
commands.
• Only the 10-gigabit ports (ports 0 and 2) are enabled.
• You can use only SFP+ transceivers in those ports.
• All four ports are enabled.
• You can use only SFP transceivers in all four ports.
Before you begin installing an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches” on page 236).
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap (If a grounding strap is not available,
follow the alternative grounding method described in Step 1 of the following procedure.)
• Cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)

To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch (see Figure 49 on page 136):
1. Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
If a grounding strap is not available, hold the uplink module in its antistatic bag in
one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch with the other hand to
ground yourself and the component.
2. Loosen the screws that secure the flip-up door covering the empty uplink module
slot on the front panel of the switch by using the cross-head screwdriver, flip the
door upward, and remove the blanking panel covering the empty uplink module slot.
NOTE: If you are removing an uplink module and installing another uplink module, wait
for at least 10 seconds after removing the uplink module before installing the new or
the same uplink module. If you do not wait for at least 10 seconds, the interfaces on the
uplink module might not come up.
3. Taking care not to touch module components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the uplink module from its bag.
CAUTION: Before you slide the uplink module into the slot on the switch chassis, ensure
the uplink module is aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend,
making the uplink module unusable.
4. Using both hands, place the module in the empty slot and slide it in gently until it is
fully seated.
5. Flip the door down and tighten the screws by using the cross-head screwdriver.
NOTE: If the switch does not detect the uplink module, see “Troubleshooting Uplink
Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 194.
Figure 49: Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch

Related Topics • Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200

page 131
• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (CLI Procedure)
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.
NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in a 1-gigabit uplink module

port, a corresponding network port from the last four built-in ports is disabled. For
example, if you install a transceiver in the 1-gigabit uplink module port 2 (ge-0/1/3),
then built-in port 23 (ge-0/0/23) is disabled. The disabled port is not listed in the output
of show interface commands.
Before you begin installing a transceiver in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches” on page 213).
Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.
Figure 50 on page 138 shows how to install an SFP transceiver. The procedure is the same
for all transceiver types.

To install a transceiver in an EX Series switch:
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not

touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.
1. Remove the transceiver from its bag.
2. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not,
cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or

removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental
exposure to laser light.
3. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover,
remove the dust cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are
hot-swapping a transceiver, wait for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver
from the port before installing a transceiver.
4. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors
must face the switch chassis.
CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure the transceiver is aligned
correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver unusable.
5. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated.
6. Remove the rubber safety cap when you are ready to connect the cable to the
transceiver.
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
Figure 50: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
Related Topics • Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 179

• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 158
Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch
EX4200 switches have two Virtual Chassis ports on the rear panel. You can use the Virtual
Chassis ports to interconnect up to 10 EX4200 switches, enabling them to operate as a
unified single high bandwidth switch. To see illustrations of a few Virtual Chassis cabling
configuration examples, see “Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200
• A cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)
NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, you must reuse the locking covers
provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers also
separately.
To connect a Virtual Chassis cable to an EX4200 switch (see Figure 51 on page 140):
1. Taking care not to touch module components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the Virtual Chassis cable from its bag.
2. Using both hands, place the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the empty Virtual
Chassis port and slide it in gently until it is fully seated.
3. Slide the locking cover over the Virtual Chassis cable connector.
4. Tighten the screws on the locking cover by using the cross-head screwdriver.

Figure 51: Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch
g020122
Slide cable connector retainer over
Virtual Chassis cable connector.
Related Topics • Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 182

page 105

CHAPTER 11
Connecting the Switch

• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem on page 155
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure

proper operation, you must connect the switches to earth ground before you connect
them to power.
For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the
protective earthing terminal on the EX Series switch chassis to connect to the earth
ground (see Figure 52 on page 141).
Figure 52: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch
Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal of an EX Series
switch, ensure that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding lug to
the grounding cable.

CAUTION: Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the
switch.
Follow the procedure that applies to your switch:
• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch on page 142

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch on page 143
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch

The protective earthing terminal is located on the rear of the chassis in an EX2200 switch
and in an EX3200 switch.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. For EX2200 switches, see AC Power Cord
Specifications for EX2200 Switches. For EX3200 switches, see “AC Power Cord
Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 102.
• Grounding cable for your switch—The grounding cable must be minimum 14 AWG
(2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
• Grounding lug for your grounding cable—The grounding lug required is a Panduit
LCD6-14BH-L or equivalent.
• Washers and 10-32x.25-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
NOTE: Some early models of EX3200 switches require 10-24x.25-in. screws rather than
10-32x.25-in. screws. If the Juniper Networks product number on the label next to the
protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx, the switch requires
10-24x.25-in. screws.
To connect earth ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 switch:
1. Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
terminal. See Figure 52 on page 141.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch

The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX4200
switch.
appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200
and EX4200 Switches” on page 102.
• Grounding cable for your EX4200 switch—The grounding cable must be minimum
14 AWG (2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
• Grounding lug for your grounding cable—The grounding lug required is a Panduit
LCD6-14BH-L or equivalent.
terminal
NOTE: Some early models of EX4200 switches require 10-24x.25-in. screws rather
than 10-32x.25-in. screws. If the Juniper Networks product number on the label next to
the protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx, the switch
requires 10-24x.25-in. screws.
To connect earth ground to an EX4200 switch:
If you mounted an EX4200 switch on four posts of a rack using the four-post
rack-mount kit, the protective earthing terminal on the switch is accessible through
the slot on the left rear bracket. See Figure 53 on page 144.
NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switch mounted on four posts
is available only if the rack is 27.5 in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switch mounted
flush with the rack front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5 in. deep for a switch mounted
2 in. recessed from the rack front.

Figure 53: Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a

Four-Post Rack

The protective earthing terminal is located on the left rear of the chassis in an EX4500
switch.
appropriate for your geographical location. See AC Power Cord Specifications for an
EX4500 Switch.
NOTE: If you plan to mount your switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, mount your
switch in the rack or cabinet before attaching the grounding lug to the switch. See
Mounting an EX4500 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
• Grounding cable for your EX4500 switch—The grounding cable must be 14 AWG
(2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
• Grounding lug for your grounding cable. See Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications
for EX4500 Switches.

terminal
NOTE: If you mounted the switch on four posts of a rack using the four-post rack-mount
kit, the protective earthing terminal on the switch is accessible through the slot on the
left rear bracket.
The protective earthing terminal on the switch mounted on four posts is available only
if the rack is 27.5 in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switch mounted flush with the rack
front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5 in. deep for a switch mounted 2 in. recessed from
the rack front.

The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX8208
switch.
EX8200 Switch.
(13.3 mm²), minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
• Washers and ¼-20x.75-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal


There are two protective earthing terminals on an EX8216 switch: one on the left side of
the chassis and the other on the rear of the chassis. Only one of the two protective earthing
terminals needs to be permanently connected to earth ground.
EX8200 Switch.
(33.6 mm²), minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
• Washers and ¼-20x.5/8-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
Related Topics • Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226
Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
The power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU) located on the rear panel: You can remove and replace it
without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Before you begin connecting AC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an incorrectly
attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short circuit).
proper operation, you must connect EX3200 and EX4200 switches to earth ground
before you connect them to power. For installations that require a separate grounding
conductor to the chassis, use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to
connect to the earth ground. For instructions on connecting earth ground, see
“Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 141. An EX3200 or EX4200
switch gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a
grounded AC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for your geographical
location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on
page 102).
• Install the power supply in the chassis. For instructions on installing a power supply in
an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, see “Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch” on page 132.
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source outlet.
• A power cord appropriate for your geographical location
To connect AC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
1. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screws on
their faceplates are tightened.
2. Squeeze the two sides of the power cord retainer clip and insert the L-shaped ends
of the wire clip into the holes in the bracket on each side of the AC power cord inlet
on the AC power supply faceplate (see Figure 54 on page 148).

3. Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the switch; the cords have plugs
appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord Specifications for
EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 102.
WARNING: Ensure that the power cord does not block access to switch components
or drape where people can trip on it.
4. Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the AC power cord inlet on the AC power
supply faceplate.
5. Push the cord into the slot in the adjustment nut of the power cord retainer. Turn
the nut until it is tight against the base of the coupler and the slot in the nut is turned
90° from the top of the switch (see Figure 55 on page 148).
6. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.
7. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.
8. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the ON (|) position.
9. Verify that the AC OK LED on the power supply is lit and is on steadily.
Figure 54: Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC Power

Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Figure 55: Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in an

EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Related Topics • Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 165

Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
The power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU) located on the rear panel: You can remove and replace it
without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Figure 56: DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
WARNING: DC-powered EX3200 and EX4200 switches are intended for installation
only in a restricted access location.
Before you begin connecting DC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an incorrectly
attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short circuit).
proper operation, you must connect EX3200 and EX4200 switches to earth ground
before you connect them to power. For installations that require a separate grounding
conductor to the chassis, use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to
connect to the earth ground. For instructions on connecting earth ground, see
“Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 141.
• Install the power supply in the chassis. For instructions on installing a power supply in
an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, see “Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch” on page 132.
• DC power source cables (12–14 AWG) with ring lug (Molex 190700067 or equivalent)
(not provided)

To connect DC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
1. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screws on
their faceplates are tightened.
2. Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the DC power
source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads will not become active while you
are connecting DC power.
NOTE: The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches has four terminals labeled
A+, B+, A–, and B– (see Figure 56 on page 149) for connecting DC power source cables
labeled positive (+) and negative (–). The DC power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200
switches are shipped with jumpers from A+ input to B+ input tied together and jumpers
from A– input to B– input tied together.
NOTE: The A+ and B+ terminals are referred to as +RTN and A– and B– terminals are
referred to as –48 V in “DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches”
on page 244 and “DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches” on
page 240.
3. Remove the screw securing the terminal block cover using the screwdriver and
remove the terminal block cover (see Figure 57 on page 150). Save the screw.
Figure 57: Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply
in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
4. Remove the screws on the terminals using the screwdriver. Save the screws.
WARNING: Ensure that the power cables do not block access to switch components
or drape where people can trip on them.
5. Connect the power supplies to the power sources. Secure power source cables to
the power supplies by screwing the ring lugs attached to the cables to the appropriate
terminals by using the screw from the terminals (see Figure 58 on page 151).

• To connect a power supply to a power source:
a. Leave the jumpers on the power supply terminals in place.
b. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable to the A+ or B+
terminal on the DC power supply.
c. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable to the A– or B–
terminal on the DC power supply.
d. Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals until snug using the
screwdriver. Do not overtighten—apply between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in.
(1.02 Nm) of torque to the screws.
If you have a second installed power supply, connect it in the same way you did
the first.
• To connect one power supply to two power sources:
a. Remove the jumpers on the power supply terminal block.
b. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable from the first
DC power source to the A+ terminal on the first DC power supply.
c. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable from the first
DC power source to the A– terminal on the first DC power supply.
d. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable from the second
DC power source to the A+ terminal on the second DC power supply.
e. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable from the second
DC power source to the A– terminal on the second DC power supply.
f. Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals on both the power supplies
until snug using the screwdriver. Do not overtighten—apply between 8 lb-in.
(0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque to the screws.
Figure 58: Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply
in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
6. Replace the terminal block cover and secure it using the screw. Use the screwdriver
to tighten the screw.

7. Close the input circuit breaker.
8. Verify that the LEDs on the power supply are lit green and are on steadily.
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
You can monitor and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated management channel.
EX Series switches have a management port with an RJ-45 connector for out-of-band
management. Use the management port to connect the EX Series switch to the
management device.
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. One such
cable is provided with the switch. Figure 59 on page 152 shows the RJ-45 connector of
the Ethernet cable supplied with the switch.
Figure 59: Ethernet Cable Connector
To connect an EX Series switch to a network for out-of-band management (see Figure

60 on page 153):
1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port (labeled MGMT)
on the EX Series switch.
For the location of the MGMT port on different EX Series switches:
• See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch.
• See “Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch” on page 8.
• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.
• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch.
• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.

Figure 60: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band

Management
Management PC
To Management port
(on the switch) Management PC
Management
network
Management PC
g020548
Related Topics • Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 153
• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX2200 Switch
• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on

page 42
• Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console
You can configure and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated console. Every EX
Series switch has a console port with an RJ-45 connector. Use the console port to connect
the EX Series switch to the management console or to a console server. The console
port accepts a cable with an RJ-45 connector.
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. An RJ-45
cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.
Figure 61 on page 153 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the
switch.

connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the
RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter.
You must provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.
To connect an EX Series switch to a management console (see Figure 62 on page 154

and Figure 63 on page 154):
1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable into the console port (labeled CON or
CONSOLE) on the EX Series switch.
For the location of the CON/CONSOLE port on different EX Series switches:
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the console server (see Figure 62
on page 154) or management console (see Figure 63 on page 154).
To configure the switch from the management console, see“Connecting and Configuring
an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 165 or “Connecting and Configuring an EX
Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)” on page 167.
Figure 62: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console

Through a Console Server
To Console port Console server
(on the switch)
PC
g020547
Figure 63: Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management

Console
To Console port Laptop CPU
(on the switch)
g020570
Related Topics • Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 152

• Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem
You can connect an EX Series switch to a modem through the console port on the switch.
Before you connect the switch to a modem:
• Perform the initial setup and configuration of the switch. See “Connecting and
Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 165 or “Connecting and
Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)” on page 167.
Ensure that you have the following parts available before you begin to connect the switch
to the modem:
• A modem (not provided)
• A desktop or notebook computer (not provided)
• An RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter and an Ethernet cable (provided)
• A phone cable (not provided)
• If your computer does not have a DB-9 male connector pin, a USB to DB-9 male adapter
(not provided)
• An adapter to connect the RS-232 DB-25 connector on the modem to the RJ-45 to
DB-9 adapter on the switch (not provided)
1. Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch on page 155
2. Configuring the Modem on page 156
3. Connecting the Modem to the Console Port on page 157
Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch

Before you can connect the switch to a modem, the switch’s serial console speed must
be set to 115200 baud.
NOTE: The default serial console speed is 9600 baud.
To change the serial console speed:
1. Power on the switch. (If the switch is an EX8208 or EX8216 model, see Powering On
an EX8200 Switch.) The loader script starts.
2. You are prompted with:

Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or space bar for command prompt.
Press the Spacebar to pause the switch in the loader state (after the Junos OS has
loaded on the switch but before the software starts).

The loader> prompt appears.
3. Set the baud rate:

loader> set baudrate=115200
Press Enter.
4. Press Enter when you see the following message:

Switch baud rate to 115200 bps and press Enter.
The loader> prompt reappears.
5. Save the new serial console speed:

loader> save
Press Enter. The serial console speed is now set to 115200 baud.
6. Boot the software:

loader> boot
The boot process proceeds as normal and ends with a login prompt.
Configuring the Modem

Before you connect the modem, you must configure the modem with required port
settings.
NOTE: The following procedure uses Hayes-compatible-modem commands to configure

the modem. If your modem is not Hayes-compatible, see the documentation for your
modem for the equivalent modem commands.
To configure the modem:
1. Connect the modem to the desktop or notebook computer.
2. Power on the modem.
3. From the computer, start your asynchronous terminal emulation application (such
as Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal) and select the COM port to which the modem
is connected (for example, COM1).
4. Configure the port settings shown in Table 34 on page 156.
Table 34: Port Settings

Port Settings Value
Bits per second 115200
Data bits 8
Parity None

Table 34: Port Settings (continued)

Port Settings Value
Stop bits 1
Flow control None
5. In the HyperTerminal window, type at. Press Enter.
The modem sends an OK response to verify that it can communicate successfully

with the COM port on your desktop or notebook computer.
6. To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring, type ats0=1 at the prompt.
Press Enter.
7. To configure the modem to accept modem-control DTR signals, type at&d1 at the
prompt. Press Enter.
8. To disable flow control on the modem, type at&k0 at the prompt. Press Enter.
9. To set the fixed serial port speed on the modem, type at&b1 at the prompt. Press
Enter.
NOTE: You must set the serial port to the fixed speed so that the modem will not adjust
the serial port speed to the negotiated line speed.
10. To save the new modem settings, type at&w0 at the prompt. Press Enter.
The modem sends an OK message. The modem is now ready to be connected to

the switch.
Connecting the Modem to the Console Port

The console port on every EX Series switch accepts a cable with an RJ-45 connector.
Figure 64 on page 157 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the
switch.
connect your laptop or PC directly to the switch, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9
female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter. You must
provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.

NOTE: Most modems have an RS-232 DB-25 connector. You must separately purchase
an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter and Ethernet cable
supplied with the switch.
To connect a modem to the console port:
1. Turn off power to the switch.
2. Turn off power to the modem.
3. Connect one end of the cable to the console port (labeled CON or CONSOLE) on the
switch.
For the location of the console port on different EX Series switches:
4. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter supplied
with your switch.
5. Connect the serial port adapter to the DB-9 female to DB-25 male adapter or other
adapter appropriate for your modem.
6. Plug the modem adapter into the DB-25 connector on the modem.
7. Connect one end of the phone cable to the modem and the other end to your
telephone network.
8. Turn on the power to your modem.
9. Power on the switch.
Related Topics • Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 153
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch
EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you
can connect fiber-optic cables.
Before you begin connecting a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an

EX Series switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling

of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches”
on page 213).
To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch:
1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered by a rubber safety cap, remove the cap.
Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 65 on page 159).
Figure 65: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver

Installed in an EX Series Switch
Transceiver
g027016
Fiber-optic cable
4. Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess
cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables
maintain their shape.
CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened loops
of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at the fastening point.
Related Topics • Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 181
• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 189


CHAPTER 12
Performing Initial Configuration
• EX3200 and EX4200 Default Configuration on page 161

EX3200 and EX4200 Default Configuration
Each EX Series switch is programmed with a factory default configuration that contains
the values set for each configuration parameter when a switch is shipped. The default
configuration file sets values for system parameters such as syslog and commit; configures
Power over Ethernet (PoE), storm control, and Ethernet switching on all interfaces; and
enables the LLDP and RSTP protocols.
When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that
becomes the active configuration. You can always revert to the factory default
configuration. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
The following factory default configuration file is for an EX3200 or EX4200 switch with
24 ports (for models that have more ports, this default configuration file has more
interfaces):
NOTE: In this example, ge-0/0/0 through ge-0/0/23 are the network interface ports.
Optional uplink modules provide either two 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable
(XFP) transceivers (xe-0/1/0 and xe-0/1/1) or four 1-gigabit SFP transceivers (ge-0/1/0
through ge-0/1/3). Although you can install only one uplink module, the interfaces for
both are shown below.
system {
syslog {
user * {
any emergency;
}
file messages {
any notice;
authorization info;
}
file interactive-commands {
interactive-commands any;

}
}
commit {
factory-settings {
reset-chassis-lcd-menu;
reset-virtual-chassis-configuration;
}
}
}
interfaces {
ge-0/0/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching;
}
}
ge-0/0/1 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/2 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/3 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/4 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/5 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/6 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/7 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/8 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/9 {

Chapter 12: Performing Initial Configuration
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/10 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/11 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/12 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/13 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/14 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/15 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/16 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/17 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/18 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/19 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/20 {
unit 0 {

}
}
ge-0/0/21 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/22 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/0/23 {
unit 0 {
}
}
xe-0/1/0 {
unit 0 {
}
}
xe-0/1/1 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/1/0 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/1/1 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/1/2 {
unit 0 {
}
}
ge-0/1/3 {
unit 0 {
}
}
}
protocols {
igmp-snooping{
vlan all;
}
lldp {
interface all;
}

lldp-med {
interface all;
}
rstp;
}
ethernet-switching-options {
storm-control {
interface all;
}
}
poe {
interface all;
}
Related Topics • Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch
• Understanding Configuration Files for EX Series Switches
• EX Series Switches Interfaces Overview
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)
There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through
the console using the CLI and the other is using the J-Web interface. This topic describes
the CLI procedure.
NOTE: To run the ezsetup script, the switch must have the factory default configuration
as the active configuration. If you have configured anything on the switch and want to
run ezsetup, revert to the factory default configuration. See Reverting to the Default
Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
Before you begin connecting and configuring an EX Series switch through the console
using the CLI:
• Set the following parameter values in the console server or PC:
• Baud Rate—9600
• Flow Control—None
• Data—8
• Parity—None

• Stop Bits—1
• DCD State—Disregard
To connect and configure the switch from the console:
1. Connect the console port to a laptop or PC using the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port
adapter. The RJ-45 cable and RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with
the switch.
• EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—The console port is located on the rear panel
of the switch.
• EX4500 switch—The console port is located on the front panel of the switch.
• EX8200 switch—The console port is located on the Switch Fabric and Routing
Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the Routing Engine
(RE) module in slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.
2. At the Junos OS shell prompt root%, type ezsetup.
3. Enter the hostname. This is optional.
4. Enter the root password you plan to use for this device. You are prompted to re-enter
the root password.
5. Enter yes to enable services like Telnet and SSH. By default, Telnet is not enabled
and SSH is enabled.
NOTE: When Telnet is enabled, you will not be able to log in to an EX Series switch
through Telnet using root credentials. Root login is allowed only for SSH access.
6. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:
NOTE: On EX4500 and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option
is available.
• Configure in-band management. In this scenario you have the following two options:
• Use the default VLAN.
• Create a new VLAN—If you select this option, you are prompted to specify the
VLAN name, VLAN ID, management IP address, and default gateway. Select
the ports that must be part of this VLAN.
• Configure out-of-band management. Specify the IP address and gateway of the

management interface. Use this IP address to connect to the switch.
7. Specify the SNMP Read Community, Location, and Contact to configure SNMP
parameters. These parameters are optional.
8. Specify the system date and time. Select the time zone from the list. These options
are optional.

The configured parameters are displayed. Enter yes to commit the configuration.
The configuration is committed as the active configuration for the switch. You can now
log in with the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch. If you use
the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is redirected to
the new management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the J-Web interface
displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.
Related Topics • Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 167
• Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)
There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through
the console using the CLI and the other is using the J-Web interface. This topic describes
the J-Web procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin the configuration, enable a DHCP client on the management
PC you will connect to the switch so that the switch can obtain an IP address
dynamically.
NOTE: Read the following steps before you begin the configuration. You must complete
the initial configuration using EZSetup within 10 minutes. The switch exits EZSetup
after 10 minutes and reverts to the factory default configuration, and the PC loses
connectivity to the switch.
• EX2200 switch—The LEDs on the network ports on the front panel blink when the
switch is in the initial setup mode.
• EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 switch—The LCD displays a count-down timer

when the switch is in initial setup mode.

To connect and configure the switch using the J-Web interface:
1. Transition the switch into initial setup mode:
• EX2200 switch—Press the mode button located on the lower right corner of the
front panel for 10 seconds.
• EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 switch—Use the Menu and Enter buttons
located to the right of the LCD panel (see Figure 66 on page 168):
Figure 66: LCD Panel in an EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 Switch
1. Press the Menu button until you see MAINTENANCE MENU. Then press the
Enter button.
2. Press Menu until you see ENTER EZSetup. Then press Enter.
If EZSetup does not appear as an option in the menu, select Factory Default
to return the switch to the factory default configuration. EZSetup is displayed
in the menu only when the switch is set to the factory default configuration.
3. Press Enter to confirm setup and continue with EZSetup.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the switch.
• EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—Connect the cable to port 0 (ge-0/0/0) on

the front panel of the switch.
• EX4500 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the front panel
of the switch.
• EX8200 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the Switch Fabric
and Routing Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the
Routing Engine (RE) module in slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.
These ports are configured as the DHCP server with the default IP address, 192.168.1.1.
The switch can assign an IP address to the management PC in the IP address range
192.168.1.2 through 192.168.1.253.
3. From the PC, open a Web browser, type http://192.168.1.1 in the address field, and
press Enter.
4. On the J-Web login page, type root as the username, leave the password field blank,
and click Login.
5. On the Introduction page, click Next.
6. On the Basic Settings page, modify the hostname, the root password, and date and
time settings:

• Enter the hostname. This is optional.
• Enter a password and reenter the password.
• Specify the time zone.
• Synchronize the date and time settings of the switch with the management PC or
set them manually by selecting the appropriate option button. This is optional.
Click Next.
7. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:
NOTE: On EX4500 and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option
is available.
• In-band Management—Use VLAN 'default' for management.
Select this option to configure all data interfaces as members of the default VLAN.
Click Next. Specify the management IP address and the default gateway for the
default VLAN.
• In-band Management—Create new VLAN for management.
Select this option to create a management VLAN. Click Next. Specify the VLAN
name, VLAN ID, member interfaces, management IP address, and default gateway
for the new VLAN.
• Out-of-band Management—Configure management port.
Select this option to configure only the management interface. Click Next. Specify
the IP address and default gateway for the management interface.
8. Click Next.
9. On the Manage Access page, you may select options to enable Telnet, SSH, and
SNMP services. For SNMP, you can configure the read community, location, and
contact.
10. Click Next. The Summary screen displays the configured settings.
11. Click Finish.
The configuration is committed as the active switch configuration. You can now log in
with the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch.
If you use the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is
redirected to the new management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the
J-Web interface displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.

NOTE: After the configuration is committed, the connectivity between the PC and the
switch might be lost. To renew the connection, release and renew the IP address by
executing the appropriate commands on the management PC or by removing and
reinserting the Ethernet cable.

PART 4
Removing Switch Components

• Removing Switch Components on page 173


CHAPTER 13
Removing Switch Components
• Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware

Components on page 173
• Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 181
• Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 182
• Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI
Procedure) on page 183
Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components
hardware components. The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX3200 and EX4200
switches are:
• Power supply
• Fan tray
• Uplink module
• SFP transceiver
• XFP transceiver
To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing

a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 132. To remove a power supply
from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Power Supply
from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 174.

To install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a

Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 133. To remove a fan tray from an
EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200
or EX4200 Switch” on page 176.
To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in

“Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 135. To remove an
uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an
To install an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow

instructions in “Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch” on page 137. To remove
an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, follow instructions
in “Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 179.
Related Topics • Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31
Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
The power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.
• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long time while the switch
is on. The power supply must remain in the chassis for proper airflow.
To remove a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch (see Figure 67 on page 175):
1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Disconnect power to the switch by performing one of the following:
• AC power supply—If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the
OFF (0) position. If the AC power source outlet does not have a power switch,
gently pull out the male end of the power cord connected to the power source
outlet.
• DC power supply—Switch the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the
DC circuit to the OFF position.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
3. Remove the power source cable from the power supply faceplate:
• AC power supply—Gently pull out the female end of the power cord connected to
the power supply faceplate.
• DC power supply—Remove the screws securing the ring lugs attached to the power
source cables to the power supply using the screwdriver, and remove the power
source cables from the power supply. Replace the screws on the terminals and
tighten them.
4. Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the
screwdriver.
5. Push down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position.
6. Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide it halfway out of the chassis.
7. Place one hand under the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of
the chassis. Take care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder
connections.
8. Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.
Figure 67: Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Related Topics • Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132

page 131

Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
EX3200 and EX4200 switches have a single fan tray on the rear panel. The fan tray is a
hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and
replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
To remove a fan tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch (see Figure 68 on page 176 and
Figure 69 on page 177):
1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Loosen the screw or screws securing the fan tray by using the screwdriver.
WARNING: To avoid injury, do not touch the fan with your hands or any tools as you
slide the fan tray out of the chassis—the fan may still be running.
3. Grasp the handle on the fan tray and pull firmly to slide the fan tray halfway out of
the chassis.
4. When the fan stops spinning, slide the fan tray completely out of the chassis.
5. Place the fan tray in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable
surface.
Figure 68: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 Switch

Figure 69: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch
NOTE: When a fan tray is removed, Fan/Blower is Absent is logged in the system log
and the system raises a minor alarm.
Related Topics • Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133

page 131
Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
If your EX3200 or EX4200 switch includes an optional uplink module, it is installed in the
switch's front panel. The different types of uplink modules are described in “Uplink
Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 34.
The uplink module in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting
switch functions.
NOTE: If you have set an uplink module port as a Virtual Chassis port (VCP), removing
the uplink module breaks the setting. You must reset the port as a VCP after you replace
the module. See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).
Before you begin removing an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches” on page 236).

• If there are any transceivers installed in the uplink module, remove them before you
remove the uplink module. For instructions on removing transceivers, see “Removing
a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 179.
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap (If a grounding strap is not available,
follow the alternative grounding method described in Step 1 of the following procedure.)
• Cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)
• An antistatic bag or antistatic mat
To remove an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch:
1. Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
If a grounding strap is not available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch
with the other hand to ground yourself and the component.
2. Loosen the screws that secure the flip-up door covering the uplink module slot on
the front panel of the switch by using the cross-head screwdriver provided with the
uplink module kit and flip the door upward.
3. Insert the ball end of the screwdriver in the keyhole on the front panel of the uplink
module and slide the screwdriver to the narrow part of the keyhole (see Figure 70
on page 179).
CAUTION: Ensure the screwdriver does not slip out of the keyhole when you pull the
uplink module out of the switch chassis.
4. Using both hands, gently pull the screwdriver to slide the uplink module halfway out
of the chassis (see Figure 71 on page 179).
5. Place one hand under the uplink module to support it and slide it completely out of
the chassis.
6. Slide the screwdriver out of the keyhole.
7. Place the uplink module in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.

Figure 70: Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole
Figure 71: Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Related Topics • Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 135

page 131
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Before you begin removing a transceiver from an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches” on page 213).

• Needlenose pliers
• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector
• A dust cover to cover the port
Figure 72 on page 181 shows how to remove an SFP transceiver. The procedure is the
same for all transceiver types.
To remove a transceiver from an EX Series switch:
1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
3. Remove the cable connected to the transceiver (see “Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic

Cable from an EX Series Switch” on page 181). Cover the transceiver and the end of
each fiber-optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately after
disconnecting the fiber-optic cables.
4. Using your fingers, pull the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
CAUTION: Before removing the transceiver, make sure you open the ejector lever
completely until you hear it click. This prevents damage to the transceiver.
5. Using the needlenose pliers, pull the ejector lever out from the transceiver.
6. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately
0.5 in. (1.3 cm) straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not

touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.
7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the
port.
8. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.
9. Place the dust cover over the empty port.
Figure 72: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
Related Topics • Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 137
Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch
EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you
can connect fiber-optic cables.
Before you begin disconnecting a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed
in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe
handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series
Switches” on page 213).
• A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver
• A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector

To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the switch:
1. Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the command:
[edit interfaces]
user@switch# set interface-name disable
2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.
3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.
Related Topics • Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 158
Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch
If you need to disconnect an EX4200 switch from a Virtual Chassis configuration, you
need to disconnect the Virtual Chassis cable from the Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs).
• A cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)
To disconnect a Virtual Chassis cable from an EX4200 switch (see Figure 73 on page 183):
1. Loosen the screws on the locking cover by using the cross-head screwdriver.
2. Slide the locking cover back.

3. Gently pull the release pull tab on the Virtual Chassis cable connector to release the
lock holding the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the Virtual Chassis port.
4. Gently pull the Virtual Chassis cable connector out of the Virtual Chassis port.
Figure 73: Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch
Virtual Chassis cable connector
Release pull tab
Cable connector retainer
g020121
NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, you must reuse the locking covers
provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers also
separately.
Related Topics • Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 139

page 105
Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI Procedure)
You can replace a member switch of a Virtual Chassis configuration without disrupting
network service for the other members. You can retain the existing configuration of the
member switch and apply it to a new member switch, or you can free up the member ID
and make it available for assignment to a new member switch.

To replace a member switch, use the procedure that matches what you need to
accomplish:
• Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch on page 184

• Remove a Member Switch, Replace with a Different Switch, and Reapply the Old
Configuration on page 184
• Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a
Different Switch on page 185
Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch

If you need to repair a member switch, you can remove it from the Virtual Chassis
configuration without disrupting network service for the other members. The master
stores the configuration of the member ID so that it can be reapplied when the member
switch (with the same base MAC address) is reconnected.
1. Power off and disconnect the member switch to be repaired.
2. Repair, as necessary.
3. Reconnect and power on the member switch.
Remove a Member Switch, Replace with a Different Switch, and Reapply the Old Configuration
If you are unable to repair a member switch, you can replace it with a different member
switch and retain the old configuration. The master stores the configuration of the member
that was removed. When you connect a different member switch, the master assigns a
new member ID. But the old configuration is still stored under the previous member ID
of the previous member switch.
NOTE: If you have used a preprovisioned configuration, use the replace command to
change the serial number in the Virtual Chassis configuration file. Substitute the serial
number of the replacement member switch (on the back of the switch) for the serial
number of the member switch that was removed.
1. Power off and disconnect the member switch to be replaced.
2. If the replacement member switch has been previously configured, revert that switch’s
configuration to the factory defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory
Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
3. Connect and power on the replacement member switch.
4. Note the member ID displayed on the front panel.
5. Issue the request virtual-chassis renumber command from the Virtual Chassis master
to change the member switch’s current member ID to the member ID that belonged
to the member switch that was removed from the Virtual Chassis configuration).

Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different
Switch
When you remove a member switch from the Virtual Chassis configuration, the master
keeps its member ID on reserve. To make that member switch’s member ID available for
reassignment, issue the request virtual-chassis recycle command from the Virtual Chassis
master.
NOTE: When you add or delete members in a Virtual Chassis configuration, internal
routing changes might cause temporary traffic loss for a few seconds.
Related Topics • Monitoring Virtual Chassis Configuration Status and Statistics
• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration (CLI Procedure) on

page 109


PART 5
Switch and Component Maintenance

• Routine Maintenance on page 189


CHAPTER 14
Routine Maintenance
Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches
Fiber-optic cables connect to optical transceivers that are installed in EX Series switches.
To maintain fiber-optic cables:
• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over
the transceiver and on the end of the cable.
• Anchor fiber-optic cables to avoid stress on the connectors. When attaching a

fiber-optic cable to a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it is
not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang
free from the connector.
• Avoid bending fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. Bending fiber-optic
cables into arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and
cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
• Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cables in and out of optical instruments
can damage the instruments, which are expensive to repair. Attach a short fiber
extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and
unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easier and less
expensive to replace than the instruments.
• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Micro-deposits of oil and dust in the canal
of the transceiver or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power,
and possibly intermittent problems with the optical connection.
To clean the transceiver canal, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device such as RIFOCS
Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the directions in the
cleaning kit you use.
After cleaning the transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable
is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such as the
®
Opptex Cletop-S Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions in the cleaning kit you use.
Related Topics • Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX8200 Switches
• Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX8200 Switches

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 213

PART 6
Troubleshooting Switch Components

• Troubleshooting Switch Components on page 193


CHAPTER 15
Troubleshooting Switch Components
• Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 193

• Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200
Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
This topic provides troubleshooting information for specific problems related to interfaces
on EX3200 and EX4200 switches.
• The interface on one of the last four built-in network ports in an EX3200 switch (for
example, interface ge-0/0/23) is down on page 193
• The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+
uplink module is down on page 194
The interface on one of the last four built-in network ports in an EX3200 switch (for example,
interface ge-0/0/23) is down
Problem The interface on one of the last four built-in ports (ge-0/0/20 through ge-0/0/23 on
24-port models or ge-0/0/44 through ge-0/0/47 on 48-port models) of an EX3200
switch is down.
An SFP or SFP+ uplink module is installed in the switch and a transceiver is installed in
one of the ports on the uplink module.
When you check the status with the CLI command show interfaces ge- or with the J-Web
user interface, the disabled port is not listed.
Cause The last four built-in ports use the same ASIC as the SFP uplink module. Therefore, if
you install a transceiver in an SFP or SFP+ uplink module installed in an EX3200 switch,
a corresponding base port from the last four built-in ports is disabled.
Solution If you need to use the disabled built-in port, you must remove the transceiver from the
SFP or SFP+ uplink module. Alternatively, you can install an XFP uplink module instead
of an SFP or SFP+ uplink module. There is no conflict between the built-in network ports
and the ports on the XFP uplink modules.

The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+ uplink
module is down
Problem The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+
uplink module installed in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is down.
Cause By default, the SFP+ uplink module operates in the 10-gigabit mode and supports only
SFP+ transceivers. The operating mode for the module is incorrectly set.
Solution Either SFP+ or SFP transceivers can be installed in SFP+ uplink modules. You must
configure the operating mode of the SFP+ uplink module to match the type of transceiver
you want to use. For SFP+ transceivers, configure the 10-gigabit operating mode and for
SFP transceivers, configure the 1-gigabit operating mode. See Setting the Mode on an
SFP+ Uplink Module (CLI Procedure).
Related Topics • Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200
• Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic
• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (J-Web Procedure)
• EX Series Switches Interfaces Overview
Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200

Switches
This topic provides troubleshooting information for specific problems related to uplink
module ports on EX3200 and EX4200 switches.
1. Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work on page 194
2. One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP+ uplink
module installed is disabled on page 195
Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work

Problem The Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection configured in an EX4200 switch does not
work.
A port of the uplink module is set as a VCP.
Cause The uplink module installed in the switch was replaced.

Chapter 15: Troubleshooting Switch Components
Solution Set a port in the uplink module as a VCP. See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual
Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).
One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP+ uplink module
installed is disabled
Problem One of the last four built-in ports (ge-0/0/20 through ge-0/0/23 on 24-port models or
ge-0/0/44 through ge-0/0/47 on 48-port models) of an EX3200 switch with an SFP or
SFP+ uplink module installed in it is disabled.
Cause The last four built-in ports use the same ASIC as the SFP uplink module. Therefore, if
you install a transceiver in an SFP or SFP+ uplink module installed in an EX3200 switch,
a corresponding base port from the last four built-in ports is disabled.
Solution If you need to use the disabled built-in port, you must remove the transceiver from the
SFP or SFP+ uplink module. Alternatively, you can install an XFP uplink module instead
of an SFP or SFP+ uplink module. There is no conflict between the built-in network ports
and the ports on the XFP uplink modules.
Related Topics • Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic
• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (J-Web Procedure)

page 105


PART 7
Returning Hardware
• Returning the Switch or Switch Components on page 199


CHAPTER 16
Returning the Switch or Switch

Components
• Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or

Replacement on page 199
• Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component on page 200
• Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series
• Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 202
Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, follow this procedure:
1. Determine the serial number of the component. For instructions, see “Locating the
Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component” on page 200.
2. Obtain an RMA number from JTAC as described in “Contacting Customer Support

to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 201.
NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained
an RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not
have an RMA. Refused shipments are returned to the customer through collect freight.
3. Pack the switch or component for shipping as described in “Packing an EX3200 or

EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping” on page 202.
For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at
http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.
Related Topics • EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, you must locate the serial number of the switch or component. You must
provide the serial number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC)
when you contact them to obtain Return Materials Authorization (RMA).
If the switch is operational and you can access the CLI, you can list serial numbers for
the switch and for some components with a CLI command. If you do not have access to
the CLI or if the serial number for the component does not appear in the command output,
you can locate the serial number ID label on the physical switch or component (see Figure
74 on page 200 and Figure 75 on page 201).
NOTE: If you want to find the serial number on the physical switch component, you will
need to remove the component from the switch chassis, for which you must have the
required parts and tools available.
• Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI on page 200
• Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch on page 200
• Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX3200 or EX4200
Switch on page 201
Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI

To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, enter the following
CLI command:
user@switch> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
ItemVersion Part number Serial number Description
Chassis AL0207391164 EX3200-48T
FPC 0 REV X1 711-021265 AL0207391164 EX3200-48T, 8 POE
CPUBUILTIN BUILTIN FPC CPU
PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 48x 10/100/1000 Base-T
Fan TrayFan Tray
Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch

EX3200 and EX4200 switches have serial number ID labels located on the rear panel of
the chassis (see Figure 74 on page 200 and Figure 75 on page 201).
Figure 74: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 Switch

Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 75: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch
Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch

The power supplies, fan trays, and uplink modules installed in EX Series switches are
field-replaceable units (FRUs).
For each of these FRUs, you must remove the FRU from the switch chassis to see the
FRU’s serial number ID label.
• Power Supply—The serial number ID label is on the top of the power supply. See
“Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 174.
• Fan tray—The serial number ID label is on the back of the fan tray. See “Removing a
Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch” on page 176.
• Uplink module—The serial number ID label is on the circuit board. See “Removing an
Related Topics • Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series
• Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on

page 199
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series

Switches
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) from Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
After locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you want to return,
open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on the Web or
by telephone.
For instructions on locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you
want to return:
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX2200 Switch or Component.
• See “Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component” on

page 200.

Before you request an RMA from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:
• Your existing case number, if you have one
• Serial number of the component
• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address
• Details of the failure or problem
• Type of activity being performed on the switch when the problem occurred
• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands
You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on the Web or by telephone:
• Case Manager at CSC: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC1-888-314-5822, toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico
NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll free numbers,
see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.
If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next
available support engineer.
The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return
of the component.
Related Topics • Packing an EX2200 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 202
• Packing an EX4500 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX8200 Switch or Component
• Returning an EX2200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on

page 199
Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping
If you are returning an EX3200 or EX4200 switch or component to Juniper Networks for
repair or replacement, pack the item as described in this topic.

Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Before you begin packing the switch or component:
• Ensure that you have retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials.
Contact your JTAC representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about
approved packing materials. See “Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return
Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 201.
• Antistatic bag, one for each switch or component
• Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping on page 203

• Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping on page 204
Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping

To pack a switch for shipping:
1. On the console or other management device connected to the switch (to the master
switch in a Virtual Chassis configuration), enter the CLI operational mode and issue
the following command to shut down the switch software:
user@switch> request system halt
Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted.
2. Disconnect power from the switch by performing one of the following:
• If the power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.
• If the power source outlet does not have a power switch, gently pull out the male
end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet.
3. Remove the cables that connect the switch to all external devices. See “Disconnecting
a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch” on page 181.
4. Remove all field-replaceable units (FRUs) from the switch.
5. If the switch is installed on a wall, rack, or cabinet, have one person support the
weight of the switch while another person unscrews and removes the mounting
screws.
6. Remove the switch from the wall, rack, cabinet, or desk (see “Chassis Lifting
Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 220) and place the switch in
an antistatic bag.
7. Place the switch in the shipping carton.
8. Place the packing foam on top of and around the switch.
9. If you are returning accessories or FRUs with the switch, pack them as instructed in
“Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping” on page 204.

10. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.
11. Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.
12. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping
CAUTION: Do not stack switch components. Return individual components in separate

boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box.
To pack and ship switch components:
• Place individual boards in antistatic bags.
• Ensure that the components are adequately protected with packing materials and
packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton.
• Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.
• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Related Topics • Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on
page 199

PART 8
Safety Information
• General Safety Information on page 207
• Radiation and Laser Warnings on page 213
• Installation and Maintenance Safety Information on page 219
• Power and Electrical Safety Information on page 235


CHAPTER 17
General Safety Information
• Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches on page 208
• Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 210
• Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches on page 211
• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches on page 212
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the EX Series switch from
damage. The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in
your working environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.
• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for
this product. Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system
services.
• Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during, and after
installation.
• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could
become caught in the chassis.
• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous
to your eyes.
• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed
for wet environments.
• Operate the EX Series switch only when it is properly grounded.
• Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product is
permanently connected to earth.

• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.
• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are
provided in the hardware documentation for this product. Such an action could cause
severe electrical shock.
• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an
action could result in electrical shock or fire.
• Avoid spilling liquid onto the EX Series switch chassis or onto any switch component.
Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the switch.
• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted
and that the installation screws are fully tightened.
Related Topics • AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 238
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 240
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
on page 226
• Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches
The documentation for EX Series switches uses the following levels of safety warnings
(there are two “Warning” formats):
NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or you might
overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.
CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or
discomfort to you or severe damage to the EX Series switch.
WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.

Chapter 17: General Safety Information
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in

een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat
werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's
en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.
WARNING: Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi
johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota
selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
ehkäisykeinoista.
WARNING: Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez

dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant
de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits
électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter
les accidents.
WARNING: Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer
Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an
irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen
verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.
WARNING: Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione

potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura,
occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche
standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
WARNING: Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon

som kan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom
på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig
praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.
WARNING: Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que
lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer

equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e

com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su
integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña
la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención
de accidentes.
WARNING: Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation

som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara
medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga
skador.
Related Topics • Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches on page 212
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
on page 226
Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches
In the event of a fire emergency involving switches and other network equipment, the
safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for protecting
people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision
fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a
fire emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable
for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire, safety, and
electrical codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your
equipment.
Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to
the equipment at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive
fire retardants, to extinguish the fire.
Fire Suppression Equipment

Chapter 17: General Safety Information
Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide
and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire extinguishers
displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire
on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling, you should use
this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves
residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers). The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium
phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult to clean. In addition, in the presence of minute
amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and
corrodes most metals.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is
subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to
be irreparably damaged.
NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to
control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks switch. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is
used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.
We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an

environmentally responsible manner.
• In Case of Electrical Accident: Action to Take on an EX Series Switch on page 248
Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the EX Series
switch.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.
Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.
Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du

personnel qualifié et compétent.
Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder

auswechseln lassen.
Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare

o sostituire questo apparecchio.

Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut dette
utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por

personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.
Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
kvalificerad personal.
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 238
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.

Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.
Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.

CHAPTER 18
Radiation and Laser Warnings
• Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches on page 216
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
EX Series switches are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a Class 1
Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1
Laser Product per EN 60825–1 requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
• General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 213

• Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 213
• Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 214
• Laser Beam Warning on page 214
General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following
safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:
• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.
WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation. The lens
in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the eye directly
on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the eye.
Class 1 Laser Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 laser product.

Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
WARNING: Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.

Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
Class 1 LED Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 LED product.

Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.
WARNING: Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.

Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.
Laser Beam Warning
WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments.

Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
WARNING: Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met

optische instrumenten.
WARNING: Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen
avulla.
WARNING: Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide
d'instruments optiques.
WARNING: Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen
Geräten prüfen.
WARNING: Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per
osservarlo direttamente.
WARNING: Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.
WARNING: Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: ¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con

instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom
optiska instrument.
• Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches on page 216

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture of the port
when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into
open apertures.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de

poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling
en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.
WARNING: Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun
kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin
aukkoihin.
WARNING: Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du

port lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas
regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.
WARNING: Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,

wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen
auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
WARNING: Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili
possono essere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni
e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er
åpne, fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en
fiberkabel.
WARNING: Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do

orifício da via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá
evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se
encontrarem a descoberto.

Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
WARNING: ¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación
invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las
aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.
WARNING: Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten
fiberkabel och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in
i oskyddade öppningar.


CHAPTER 19
Installation and Maintenance Safety

Information

• Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220
• Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches on page 220
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series
Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the switch to a power
source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les

directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.
Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema

all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de

alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess

strömförsörjningsenhet.
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
The weight of a fully loaded EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis is approximately 22 lb

(10 kg). Observe the following guidelines for lifting and moving an EX3200 or EX4200
switch:
• Before installing an EX3200 or EX4200 switch, read the guidelines in “Site Preparation
Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches” on page 87 to verify that the intended
site meets the specified power, environmental, and clearance requirements.
• Before lifting or moving the EX3200 or EX4200 switch, disconnect all external cables.
• As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your
back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your
body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid.
Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: When installing the switch, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.
Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.
Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.
Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados
Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches
Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the EX Series switch is installed is evenly and
securely supported. Uneven mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.
WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the switch in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:
• The switch must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building structure.
• The switch should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the
rack.
• When mounting the switch on a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
• If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting
or servicing the switch in the rack.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel

in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale

voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De

onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
• De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan een
bouwsel is verankerd.
• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige
in het rek is.
• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van
onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.
• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te

monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft.
WARNING: Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa
telineessä, on noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi,
jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen.
• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta
kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen

tai sen huoltamista siinä.
WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de
montage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions
spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont
destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à la structure
du bâtiment.
• Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le
bas.
• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de
bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
• Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant

de monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

WARNING: Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten
dieser Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
• Der Juniper Networks switch muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht
werden.
• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von
unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen
ist.
• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.
WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione

di questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che
il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza
personale:
• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.
• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica unità
da montare nel supporto.
• Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il

supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del
supporto.
• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di

montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på

denne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.
Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
• Juniper Networks switch må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til
bygningsstrukturen.
• Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i
kabinettet.

• Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet lastes
fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.
• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før

montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.
WARNING: Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta
unidade numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o
sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o
seu trabalho com segurança:
• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura do
edificio.
• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única
unidade a ser montada.
• Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais
pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.
• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou

reparar a unidade.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un
bastidor, o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado
en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las
siguientes instrucciones:
• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del
edificio.
• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el
mismo.
• Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado, comenzar

la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo más pesado
en la parte inferior.
• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar

o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.
WARNING: Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför
underhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda

försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer
ges för att trygga din säkerhet:
• Juniper Networks switch måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i byggnadens
struktur.
• Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned
på ställningen.
• Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån
och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
• Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan

enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.
• Mounting an EX2200 Switch
• Mounting an EX4500 Switch
• Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
Wall-Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
WARNING: When mounted in a vertical position, an EX3200 or EX4200 chassis must

be oriented with the front panel of the chassis pointing down to ensure proper airflow
and meet safety requirements in the event of a fire.
WARNING: Avertissement: lorsqu’installé en position verticale, un châssis de

commutation EX3200 ou EX4200 doit être orienté avec le panneau avant dirigé vers
le bas.
WARNING: Warnhinweis: Bei der Befestigung in vertikaler Position muss ein EX3200-
oder EX4200-Switch-Gehäuse so ausgerichtet werden, dass das vordere Bedienfeld
des Switch-Gehäuses nach unten zeigt.
Related Topics • Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 128

Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The switch is intended to be grounded. During normal use, ensure that you
have connected earth ground to the switch chassis.
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer
tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite on

yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil hôte est relié
à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät
während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il

dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt
bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se encontra
ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal
esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid
normal användning.
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
While performing the maintenance activities for EX Series switches, observe the following
guidelines and warnings:
• Battery Handling Warning on page 227

• Jewelry Removal Warning on page 228
• Lightning Activity Warning on page 229
• Operating Temperature Warning on page 230
• Product Disposal Warning on page 232

Battery Handling Warning
WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace a

battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen

wordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de
fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig
fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.
WARNING: Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä
vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan
suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.
WARNING: Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.

Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par
le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
WARNING: Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen
Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des
Herstellers.
WARNING: Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte.
Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser
brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
WARNING: Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata

correttamente. Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal
produttore. Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.
WARNING: Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.

Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo
fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.

WARNING: ¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera

incorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones
del fabricante.
WARNING: Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet

med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ
tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
Jewelry Removal Warning
WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove

jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when connected
to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can be welded to the terminals.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische

leidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen.
Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden,
en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de
aansluitklemmen lassen.
WARNING: Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden

parissa, ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien).
Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne
voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.
WARNING: Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques,
ôter tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à
l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut provoquer
des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.
WARNING: Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,
jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.
Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen
werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen
angeschweißt werden.

WARNING: Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di

alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi).
Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e
massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.
WARNING: Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du
skal arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet
til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader eller
smelte fast til polene.
WARNING: Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de

corrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os
objectos metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação
à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de

alimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de
metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede
ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.
WARNING: Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)
innan du arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas
upp när de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador;
metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.
Lightning Activity Warning
WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
of lightning activity.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet
aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.
WARNING: Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota
kaapeleita ukkosilmalla.

WARNING: Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les

câbles pendant un orage.
WARNING: Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an
bzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
WARNING: Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi
durante un temporale con fulmini.
WARNING: Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra
systemet når det tordner eller lyner.
WARNING: Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos
de mau tempo (trovoada).
WARNING: ¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante

el transcurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.
WARNING: Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta
eller koppla loss kablar.
Operating Temperature Warning
WARNING: To prevent the switch from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104° F (40° C). To
prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around the
ventilation openings.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networks

router dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de
maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° C wordt overschreden. Om te
voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling rond
de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.

WARNING: Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä

ei saa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun
ympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on
jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.
WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper
Networks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est
supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au moins
15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.
WARNING: Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf
dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das
empfohlene Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern,
achten Sie darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen
herum frei bleibt.
WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in

un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitare che la
circolazione dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte alle
aperture delle ventole.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks

switch Disse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale
omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringen rundt
lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.
WARNING: Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks

switch, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima
recomendada de 40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos um
espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks

switch se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura
ambiente máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada de
aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilación.

WARNING: Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genom att
inte använda den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade
omgivningstemperaturen på 40° C överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks
genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring
ventilationsöppningarna.
Product Disposal Warning
WARNING: Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and
regulations.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en

voorschriften te worden afgedankt.
WARNING: Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia

valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.
WARNING: Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée

conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.
WARNING: Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften
entsprechend entsorgt werden.
WARNING: Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita

osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia
WARNING: Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til

nasjonale lover og forskrifter.
WARNING: Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo
com os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.
WARNING: ¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas
las leyes y regulaciones nacionales

WARNING: Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets
alla lagar och föreskrifter.


CHAPTER 20
Power and Electrical Safety Information
• AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 239
• Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 240
• Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200 Switches on page 240
• DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242
• DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 243
• DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244
• DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246
• TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches on page 247
• In Case of Electrical Accident: Action to Take on an EX Series Switch on page 248
General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Certain ports on the switch are designed for use as intrabuilding
(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP)
cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning surges and
commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The intrabuilding ports
on the switch are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling
only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a switch, attach an ESD strap

to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure to
use an ESD strap could result in damage to the switch.

• Install the EX Series switch in compliance with the following local, national, and
international electrical codes:
• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States

National Electrical Code.
• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1

through Part 7.
• Evaluated to the TN power system.
• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.
• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that
if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
• Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before
grounding connections are made.
• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace.
• Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before
starting to work.
• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded
power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
• Operate the EX Series switch within marked electrical ratings and product usage
instructions.
• To ensure that the EX Series switch and peripheral equipment function safely and
correctly, use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral
equipment, and make certain they are in good condition.
You can remove and replace many switch components without powering off or
disconnecting power to the switch, as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation
for this product. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches
Switch components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from
static electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You
can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic
or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe
the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
• Always use an ESD grounding strap when you are handling components that are subject
to ESD damage, and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.
If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see Figure
76 on page 237) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch with the
other hand immediately before inserting the component into the switch.
WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap. The
measurement must be in the range of 1 through 10 Mohms.
• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed
from the chassis, make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to the
ESD point on the chassis.
If no grounding strap is available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch to ground
yourself before handling the component.
• Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing.
ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.
• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage, always place
it component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an
antistatic bag (see Figure 76 on page 237). If you are returning a component, place it in
an antistatic bag before packing it.
Figure 76: Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag
CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as category 5e and category 6 can get

electrostatically charged. In order to dissipate this charge, always ground the cables
to a suitable and safe earth ground before connecting them to the system.
• See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 for the ESD point location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for the ESD point location.
• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8208 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the ESD point location.
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches
CAUTION: For switches with AC power supplies, an external surge protective device
(SPD) must be used at the AC power source.
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered switches:
• Note the following warnings printed on the chassis:
“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT
ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”
“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.

AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
• AC-powered switches are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a

grounding-type plug that fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent
this safety feature. Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical
codes.
• You must provide an external certified circuit breaker rated minimum 20 A in the building
installation.
• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the switch. The socket
outlet must be near the switch and be easily accessible.
• For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection, you must
ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the switch
is completely removed to avoid electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power
cords (one for each power supply).
Power Cable Warning (Japanese)
WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Before working on the switch or near power supplies, unplug all the power
cords from an AC switch.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient
u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään

asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation électrique,

débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten, ziehen
Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo

di alimentazione sulle unità CA.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de

fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada.
¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente

de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente
alterna (CA).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du
för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection,
you must ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to
the switch is completely removed.
Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200 Switches
EX4200 switches have a redundant power supply. When you have redundant power
supplies in a switch, you must connect each power supply to a different input power
source. Failure to do so makes the switch susceptible to total power failure if one of the
power supplies fails.
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC-powered switch:

• A DC-powered switch is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power
requirements of a maximally configured switch.
NOTE: To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source
capable of supplying at least 8 A at –48 VDC for EX3200 and EX4200 switches.
To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable
of supplying at least 60 A at –48 VDC for EX8208 switches.
To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable
of supplying at least 100 A at –48 VDC for EX8216 switches.
Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be sure to
connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground. A closed loop ring is
recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.
• Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.
• A DC-powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for
installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a restricted access
area is one in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical
Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker. This
breaker must protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth grounding faults
in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.
• Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage
the equipment.
• For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground at both
the switch and the supply side of the DC wiring.
• The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered switch is the nominal voltage
associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated
with float voltages for the charging function.
• Because the switch is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive lead to
the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the
earth ground to the chassis grounding points.

DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure that power is
removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker
on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF
position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te
verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar
de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in
de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden

suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin
KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy
KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier que
le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le
disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le
disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée
du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie
den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il
circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito
CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet

likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og
teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou

a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar
que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito

de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição

a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.
¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda
la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que
alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posición
de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición
de Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att

strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning
är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen
och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches
An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded
branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed
as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit. The grounding conductor is a separately
derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.
WARNING: When you install the switch, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste
worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja

maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être connectée
en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt
und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento

a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles

sist.
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada,
e a última a ser desligada.
¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.
Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
kopplas bort sist.
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then –48 V to
–48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN
to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire must always be connected
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN naar
+RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en –48 naar
–48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.
Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten

+RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten – 48 V,
+RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.
Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets

appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage
est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à –48 V. En débranchant la puissance,
l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 V à –48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié pour
rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour
la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché
pour la dernière fois.

Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ringösen an das DC Netzteil
anzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss, +RTN
zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenz zum Abtrennen der
Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN und dann Erdanschluss zu
Erdanschluss. Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss immer zuerst angeschlossen
und als letztes abgetrennt wird.
Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC

usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta
sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e da
negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre
venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.
Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V til –
48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN, jord til jord.
Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en
el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado se
muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces –48 V a –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la
secuencia apropiada del cableado es –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió
para moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y
desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre
primero y desconectar por último.
¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados na

extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é
moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a
seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer.
Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por
último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e
desconectado por último.
Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till –48 V.
Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till jord.

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such
as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations must be the
appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken
die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of
het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten
dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de
geleider vast te klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää, esimerkiksi

suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt kiinnityskorvat.
Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen
sekä eristeen että johdinosan.
Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et
doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.
Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene

Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig,
mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die
angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter
festklemmen.
Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a
occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la
misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.
Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente

ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbøyde
kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til ledningene, og skal
klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido,

use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito
fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de
cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão prender
simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.
¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables

homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de
conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para
los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor.

Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,

t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa
kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen
och ledaren fastklämda.
TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The switch is designed to work with a TN power system.

Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN energiesystemen.
Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.
Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes d'alimentation
TN.
Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.
Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN.
Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.
Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.
¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo
TN.
Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av

TN-typ.

In Case of Electrical Accident: Action to Take on an EX Series Switch
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.
2. Disconnect power from the switch.
3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition
of the victim, then call for help.

PART 9
Compliance Information
• Compliance Information on page 251


CHAPTER 21
Compliance Information
• Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 251

• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 252
• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 254
• Declaration of Conformity for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 255
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches
EX Series switches comply with the following standards:
• Safety
• CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950–1–03/UL 60950–1. Safety of Information Technology

Equipment
• EN 60950–1:2001. Safety of Information Technology Equipment
• EN 60825–1 Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,

Requirements and User's Guide
• EMC
• FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A (USA)
• EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)
• ICES-003 Class A
• VCCI Class A (Japan)
• AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)
• CISPR 22 Class A
• EN 55024
• EN 300386
• EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
• EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker

• EN 61000-4-2 ESD
• EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity
• EN 61000-4-4 EFT
• EN 61000-4-5 Surge
• EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity
• EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags
Related Topics • Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 252
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches
This topic describes the EMC requirements for EX Series switches for:
• Canada on page 252

• European Community on page 253
• Japan on page 253
• United States on page 253
• FCC Part 15 Statement on page 253
• Non-Regulatory Environmental Standards on page 254
Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and
safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to
the users’ satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the
equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the
inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means
of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with
the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance

facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Chapter 21: Compliance Information
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by

themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician,
as appropriate.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
European Community
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Japan
The preceding translates as follows:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
VCCI-A
United States
The EX Series switch has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
FCC Part 15 Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.
Non-Regulatory Environmental Standards

NEBS compliance—These EX Series switch models are Network Equipment Building
System (NEBS) compliant:
• EX2200-24T and EX2200-48T
• EX3200-24T, EX3200-48T, EX4200-24F, EX4200-24T, and EX4200-48T
• All EX8200 models
Those switch models meet the following NEBS compliance standards:
• SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)
• GR-1089-CORE: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications Equipment
• GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection
• The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network
(CBN).
• The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical
Code (NEC) applies.
• The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return (DC-I), as

defined in GR-1089-CORE.
Related Topics • Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 251
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel

beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779
Translation:
The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779.

Chapter 21: Compliance Information
Declaration of Conformity for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches


Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and

EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

ii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. iii

iv Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. v

vi Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. vii

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

viii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. ix

Connecting the Modem to the Console Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance

Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components

x Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Part 7 Returning Hardware

Part 8 Safety Information

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xi

Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Part 9 Compliance Information

xii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xiii

Figure 30: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

xiv Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Figure 59: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Part 7 Returning Hardware

Part 8 Safety Information

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xv

xvi Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xvii

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

xviii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

• How to Use This Guide on page xix

How to Use This Guide

Complete documentation for the EX Series product family is provided on webpages at

List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xix

Software Topic Collections Software feature descriptions, configuration examples

xx Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxi

Documentation Symbols Key

Icon Meaning Description

Informational note Indicates important features or instructions.

Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware

Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.

Text and Syntax Conventions

Convention Description Examples

xxii Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.